KR100763623B1 - Image display apparatus, electronic apparatus, liquid crystal tv, liquid crystal monitoring apparatus, image display method, and computer-readable recording medium - Google Patents

Abstract

The image display apparatus divides one frame period into a plurality of sub frame periods, determines respective gradation levels of the sub frame periods according to the gradation level of the input image signal, and supplies the determined gradation levels to the image display section to display the images. To do so. The image display device supplies a relatively large gradation level in a temporal center of one frame period or a relatively most central subframe period closest to the temporal center, and sequentially away from a relatively central subframe period. And a display control unit for sequentially supplying gradation levels in the separated sub frame periods.

Description

IMAGE DISPLAY APPARATUS, ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, LIQUID CRYSTAL TV, LIQUID CRYSTAL MONITORING APPARATUS, IMAGE DISPLAY METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM}

1 is a block diagram showing the basic structure of an image display device according to the present invention.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an exemplary structure of the controller LSI shown in FIG.

Fig. 3 is a timing chart of signals of the image display device of Embodiment 1 according to the present invention.

Fig. 4 shows a method in which the image signal on the screen is rewritten by repeating the display control shown in the image display device of the first embodiment.

Fig. 5 shows a change in the gradation level of the input image signal when a predetermined display panel is used.

FIG. 6 shows that when the gradation level of the input image signal is changed as shown in FIG. 5, the sub frame period alpha is assigned to the first sub frame period and the sub frame period beta is applied to the second sub frame period. The luminance change of the display panel as it is assigned is shown.

FIG. 7 shows that when the gradation level of the input image signal is changed as shown in FIG. 5, the sub frame period β is assigned to the first sub frame period and the sub frame period α is set to the second sub frame period. The luminance change of the display panel as it is assigned is shown.

8 shows a target luminance level of Embodiment 1. FIG.

Fig. 9 shows the relationship between the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period and the gradation level of the input image signal satisfying the formula (2) of the first embodiment.

Fig. 10 shows a change in luminance with time on one horizontal line of the screen when the object moves horizontally with the still background of the image display device of the first embodiment.

FIG. 11 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 10 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

FIG. 12 shows the luminance difference according to the temperature condition when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel used in Example 1 is not adjusted in accordance with the temperature condition.

Fig. 13 shows the luminance difference according to the temperature condition when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel used in the first embodiment is adjusted in accordance with the temperature condition.

Fig. 14 shows luminance assumed for an image input signal which is gradually changed in the image display apparatus of the first embodiment.

FIG. 15 shows a luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the object having the luminance shown in FIG. 14 is moved horizontally with the still background of the image display device of Embodiment 1. FIG.

FIG. 16 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 15 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

Fig. 17 shows the target luminance level of Embodiment 2 according to the present invention.

Fig. 18 shows the relationship between the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period and the gradation level of the input image signal satisfying equation (2) of the second embodiment.

Fig. 19 shows a change in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when the still background and the object of the image display device of Example 2 move horizontally.

FIG. 20 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 19 visible to an observer looking at a moving object.

Figure 21 shows a target luminance level of Embodiment 3 according to the present invention.

Fig. 22 shows the relationship between the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period satisfying equation (2) of the third embodiment and the gradation level of the input image signal.

Fig. 23 shows a change in luminance with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object of the image display device of Example 3 move horizontally.

FIG. 24 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 23 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

Fig. 25 shows a target luminance level of Embodiment 4 according to the present invention.

Fig. 26 shows the relationship between the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period satisfying equation (2) of the fourth embodiment and the gradation level of the input image signal.

FIG. 27 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object move horizontally in the image display device of Example 4. FIG.

FIG. 28 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 27 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

Fig. 29 shows the luminance difference according to the temperature condition when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel used in the fourth embodiment is not adjusted in accordance with the temperature condition.

Fig. 30 shows the luminance difference according to the temperature condition when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel used in the fourth embodiment is adjusted according to the temperature condition.

Fig. 31 shows changes in luminance with time of one horizontal line of the screen when an object having a strong red component, weak green and blue components moves horizontally with the black still background of the image display device of Embodiment 5 according to the present invention. do.

Fig. 32 shows the change in luminance over time of one horizontal line of the screen when an object having a strong red component, a weak green and a blue component moves horizontally with the black still background of another image display apparatus of the fifth embodiment.

33 is a block diagram of an exemplary structure of the controller LSI shown in FIG.

34 is a timing chart of signals of the image display device of Example 6 according to the present invention.

FIG. 35 shows a method in which an image signal on a screen is rewritten in the image display device of Example 6. FIG.

Fig. 36 shows changes in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when the still background and the object in the image display device of Example 6 move horizontally.

FIG. 37 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 36 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram of an exemplary structure of Embodiment 7 of the present invention of the controller LSI shown in FIG.

FIG. 39 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object move horizontally in the image display device of Example 7. FIG.

FIG. 40 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 39 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram of an exemplary structure of Embodiment 8 of the present invention of the controller LSI shown in FIG.

Fig. 42 is a timing chart of signals of the image display device of Example 8 according to the present invention.

Fig. 43 shows a method in which the image signals on the screen are rewritten in the image display apparatus of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 44 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object move horizontally in the image display device of Example 8. FIG.

FIG. 45 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 44 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

Fig. 46 shows changes in luminance with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object move horizontally in the conventional impulse type image display apparatus.

FIG. 47 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 46 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

Fig. 48 shows a change in luminance over time of one horizontal line of a screen when a still background and an object move horizontally in a conventional conventional hold-type image display device.

FIG. 49 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 48 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

Fig. 50 shows the change in luminance with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object of the hold-type image display device adopting the minimum (luminance) insertion system move horizontally.

FIG. 51 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 50 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

52 shows Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. When the still background and the object of the conventional hold image display device disclosed by 2001-296841 move horizontally, the luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen is shown.

FIG. 53 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 52 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

Fig. 54 shows the relationship between the gradation level of the conventional input image signal and the display luminance generated in consideration of the gamma luminance characteristic of the CRT, and the display luminance and gradation of the image of the conventional hold image display apparatus compatible with the conventional image signal; Show the relationship between levels.

Fig. 55 is a view of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 1 including a conventional hold display panel. The relationship between the display brightness of the image display device proposed by the seventh embodiment of 2001-296841 and the gradation level of the image signal is shown.

Fig. 56 shows a luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object of the normal hold image display device move horizontally.

FIG. 57 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 56 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

FIG. 58 shows a luminance change with time of one horizontal line of a screen when a still background having a specific luminance and an object having a specific luminance move horizontally in the image display device of Example 1. FIG.

FIG. 59 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 58 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object. FIG.

Fig. 60 is a block diagram showing the basic structure of the image display device of Example 9 according to the present invention.

FIG. 61 is a block diagram of an exemplary structure of the controller LSI shown in FIG. 60. FIG.

Fig. 62 shows six examples of the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal, the gradation level of the first and second sub frame periods, and the perceived brightness having different target luminance levels.

Fig. 63 is a graph showing the relationship (a recognized brightness) between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated luminance during the first and second sub frame periods when the lookup tables A to C are used.

64 is a block diagram of the structure of an image display control unit provided by a computer of a tenth embodiment according to the present invention;

Fig. 65 is a block diagram of the structure of the liquid crystal TV of Example 11, using the image display device according to the present invention.

Fig. 66 is a block diagram of the structure of the liquid crystal monitoring device of Example 12, using the image display device according to the present invention.

67A to 67D, 68E to 68H, 69I to 69L, 70M to 70P, and 71Q to 71S show the luminance level assumed for the input image signal in a subframe of the image display apparatus according to the present invention. A conceptual diagram of a subframe period is shown illustrating an example method of allocating to a period.

This application claims 35 U.S.C. Based on Section 119 (a), the patent application No. filed in Japan on November 17, 2003, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Patent application No. 2003-387269 and filed in Japan on November 16, 2004. Insist on priority over 2004-332509.

The present invention is, for example, an image display device using a hold display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an EL (electroluminescence) display device; Electronic devices using an image display device for a display unit, a liquid crystal television, a liquid crystal monitoring device; An image display method for performing image display using the image display apparatus described above; A display control program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method; And a computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon a display control program.

Conventional image display apparatuses include impulse display apparatuses such as cathode ray tubes (CRT), film projectors, and the like; And hold-type display devices using hold-type display elements such as the above-described liquid crystal display device, EL display device, and the like.

In the impulse type display device, the lighting period in which the image is displayed and the lighting period in which the image is not displayed are selectively repeated. The human eye is considered to recognize the luminance obtained by the time integration of the luminance change of the image substantially displayed on the screen for a period of approximately several frames, such as the brightness. Therefore, the human eye can observe an image displayed by an image display device such as an impulse type image display device in which the luminance changes within a short period of one frame or less, without feeling unnatural.

Fig. 46 shows changes in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves horizontally with a still background in a conventional impulse type image display apparatus. In Fig. 46, the horizontal axis represents the state in the horizontal direction of the screen (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction) and the vertical axis represents the time. Fig. 46 shows an image displayed on the screen in three frames.

In Fig. 46, each one frame period T101 is a cycle in which an image is updated. In the impulse type image display apparatus shown in Fig. 46, the lighting period T102 is at the beginning of each one frame period T101. The unlit period 103 is after the lit period T102 until the image is updated in the next frame. In the unlit period T103, the luminance is minimum.

Regarding the display state of one horizontal line, the display portion A of the moving object is inserted between the display portions B of the still background. Each time the image is updated frame by frame, the display portion A moves to the right.

The observer's eye paying attention to the display portion A follows the display portion A and thus moves in the direction indicated by the inclined thick arrow. The value obtained by the time integration of the luminance change in the moving direction of the object is recognized as brightness by the human eye.

FIG. 47 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 46 as seen by the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object.

In the case of the impulse type image display apparatus, the period from the image update to the next image update is mostly an unlit period T103. The luminance in the sufficiently low extinction period T103 does not contribute to the time-integrated luminance (the value of the vertical axis). As a result, the observer's eye can clearly see the difference in brightness at the boundary between the stationary background and the moving object. Thus, the observer's eye can clearly identify the background and the object.

The hold image display device is considered to be inferior to an impulse image display device in terms of the quality of a moving image. This is explained in detail below.

Fig. 48 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves horizontally with a still background in a conventional conventional hold-type image display apparatus. In Fig. 48, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction) in the horizontal direction of the screen, and the vertical axis represents time. Figure 48 shows an image displayed on the screen in three frames.

In FIG. 48, unlike in FIG. 46, each one frame period T101 is a whole lighting period T102. No extinction period is provided.

FIG. 49 shows a distribution of brightness of the image shown in FIG. 48 visible to the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object.

Since all one frame period T101 is the lighting period T102, the object is displayed as if it remains in the same position from the image update until the next image update. As a result, the value obtained by the time integration of the luminance change in the moving direction of the object does not reflect the difference in brightness of the boundary between the still background and the moving object. Thus, the observer's eye looks at the boundary as a movement blob. This is one cause of the deterioration of the image quality of a general conventional hold image display apparatus.

One solution to this problem of the hold-type image display device is to reduce the duration of the lighting period by half, and to provide a period (minimum luminance period) in which image display is performed at the minimum luminance level. In the following, such a system is referred to as a "minimum (luminance) insertion system".

Fig. 50 shows a change in luminance with respect to one horizontal line time on a screen when an object moves horizontally with a still background in a conventional hold image display apparatus adopting a minimum (luminance) insertion system. In Fig. 50, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state in the horizontal direction of the screen (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction), and the vertical axis represents time. 50 shows an image displayed on the screen in three frames.

In FIG. 50, unlike in FIG. 48, each one frame period T101 includes a half frame unlit period (or minimum luminance period or minimum (luminance) insertion period) T103.

FIG. 51 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 50 as seen by the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object.

FIG. 51 shows that the movement unevenness is alleviated in comparison with the conventional conventional hold-type image display device shown in FIG.

However, in the conventional hold-type image display apparatus adopting the minimum (luminance) insertion system, each one frame period is the minimum luminance period (or the minimum (luminance) insertion period or the unlit period, even when image display is performed at the maximum gradation level. ). Therefore, the maximum luminance recognized by the observer's eye is half of the maximum luminance of a conventional conventional hold-type image display apparatus which does not adopt the minimum (luminance) insertion system.

In particular, when a display element such as an EL display element which spontaneously emits light is used for the above-described hold-type image display device, the maximum luminance decreases as compared with a conventional conventional hold-type image display device that does not adopt the minimum (luminance) insertion system. Is inevitable.

Another solution to the moving spot problem has been proposed for transmissive display elements such as transmissive liquid crystal display elements. According to the proposed solution, the brightness of the backlight is increased to ensure a maximum brightness level that is nearly the same as a conventional conventional hold-type image display device that does not employ a minimum (luminance) insertion system.

The proposed solution has the following drawbacks. First, the power consumption of the backlight is increased. Secondly, even while image display is performed at the minimum luminance (black period), light from the backlight can be transmitted through the display element. Therefore, the minimum luminance level cannot be almost equal to the minimum luminance level of the hold-type image display device which does not adopt the minimum (luminance) insertion system. As a result, the contrast is lowered.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-296841 solves the problem of motion blur by, for example, ensuring a maximum luminance level almost equal to the maximum luminance level of a conventional conventional hold-type image display device that does not employ a minimum (luminance) insertion system. In order to improve the quality, the following image display method according to claims 27 to 41 is proposed. A specific method of driving the display device and providing an image signal of a predetermined gradation level is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. It is described in detail in Example 7 of 2001-296841. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-296841 are all incorporated herein by reference.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. According to the image display method proposed by 2001-296841, one frame of image display is performed using two sub frame periods, that is, a first sub frame period and a second sub frame period. When the gradation level of the input image signal is 0% or more and less than 50%, an image signal of 0% to 100% gradation level is supplied in the first sub frame period, and an image signal of 0% gradation level is supplied to the second subframe. Supplied in the period. When the gradation level of the input image signal is 50% or more and less than 100%, an image signal of 0% to 100% gradation level is supplied in the first sub frame period, and an image signal of 100% gradation level is supplied in the second sub frame period. Supplied to.

52 shows Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. In the conventional hold image display device disclosed by 2001-296841, a change in luminance with time of one horizontal line in a screen when an object moves horizontally with a still background is shown. In Fig. 52, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction) in the horizontal direction of the screen, and the vertical axis represents time. Figure 52 shows an image displayed on the screen in three frames.

In Fig. 52, unlike in Fig. 48, each one frame period T101 includes two subframe periods T201 and T202.

This will be explained in more detail. As shown in Fig. 52, for the display portion B of the still background, the gradation level of the input image signal is low. Therefore, the display portion B is in the lit state only in the first sub frame period T201 and in the unlit state (0%) in the second sub frame period T202. For the display portion A of the moving object, the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently high. Therefore, the display portion A is in the lit state of the maximum luminance (100%) in the second sub frame period T202, and displays the image signal of the gray level signal of 0% to 100% in the first sub frame period T201. Have a lighting state of 20% luminance. A numerical value with "%" indicates the luminance level of the image for the maximum display capability of 100%. For example, a numerical value surrounded by a dotted line for B1 indicates a luminance of 40%.

Such an image display method can ensure a maximum luminance level and contrast almost equal to the maximum luminance level of a conventional hold-type image display apparatus that does not adopt a minimum (luminance) insertion system, and the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently low. The quality of moving images can be improved.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-23707 discloses another method for suppressing the reduction in the luminance of a hold-type image display device employing a minimum (luminance) insertion system. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. According to the method disclosed in 2002-23707, one frame period includes a plurality of subframe periods, and the luminance of one of the subsequent frames is attenuated at a predetermined ratio in accordance with the luminance of the input image signal. Therefore, the movement blur visually recognized in the general conventional hold-type image display apparatus can be prevented. Since the luminance of one of the subsequent subframe periods is attenuated as described above, the reduction in luminance is compared with the conventional hold-type image display apparatus adopting the minimum (luminance) insertion system as shown in Figs. Can be further suppressed.

In order to display an image of a moving object horizontally with a still background, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. The conventional image display device disclosed by 2001-296841 is similar to the conventional hold-type image display device adopting the minimum (luminance) insertion system shown in Figs. 50 and 51 as long as the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently low. It can provide substantially the same effect. However, when the gradation level of the input image signal is high, the following problem occurs.

FIG. 53 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 52 as seen by the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object.

As shown in Fig. 53, part of the image is brighter than the original image, and other parts of the image are darker than the original image. As a result, the observer's eye sees an abnormally bright and abnormally dark part at the leading end or rear end of the moving object which is not visible in the still image. This lowers the quality of the moving image.

The reason why such an abnormally bright and abnormally dark part is seen is that the temporal center position of the lighting period is significantly different between when the gradation level of the input image signal is less than 50% and when the gradation level of the input image signal is 50% or more. For example, when the gradation level of the input image signal is less than 50%, since an image signal of gradation level of 0% is supplied to the second sub frame period T202, the temporal center position of the lighting period is the first sub frame period. (T201). When the gradation level of the input image signal is 50% or more, since the image signal of 100% gradation level is supplied to the second sub frame period T202, the temporal center position of the lighting period (display luminance) is changed to the second sub frame period ( T202). For this reason, abnormally bright and abnormally dark portions are seen at the leading end or the rear end of the moving object in terms of the values obtained by the time integration of the luminance change in the moving direction of the object.

Current general image signals, such as TV broadcast signals, video reproduction signals, and PC (personal computer) image signals, are mostly generated and output in consideration of gamma luminance characteristics of cathode ray tubes (CRTs). For example, display panels using hold type display devices such as liquid crystal display devices and EL display devices generally have gamma luminance characteristics substantially the same as in CRTs so as to be compatible with general image signals.

54 is a graph showing a relationship between the gradation level of an input image signal and the display luminance of the display panel having the gamma luminance characteristic. As shown in Fig. 54, the relationship is generally represented by a curve that becomes concave at lower luminance. From this, it can be seen that the 50% luminance point and the 50% gradation level point do not match each other.

55 shows Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. When the display control described in Embodiment 7 of 2001-296841 is performed using a hold-type image display apparatus having gamma luminance characteristics, time-integrated corresponding to the gradation level of the input signal and the brightness perceived by the observer's eye The relationship between the luminance is shown.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. In the seventh embodiment of 2001-296841, when the gradation level of the input image signal is 50% or more, the image signal is supplied in two subframe periods (first and second subframe periods). In contrast, when the gradation level of the input image signal is less than 50%, the image signal is supplied only in one subframe period (only in the first subframe period). Thus, the luminance characteristic curve has two concave surfaces at a luminance point of 50% at the center thereof. With such a luminance characteristic curve, proper color reproducibility for a normal input image signal cannot be realized.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. The method disclosed by 2002-23707 leaves the picture lit in one of the subsequent subframe periods of one frame period each, and thus a general hold picture display adopting the minimum (luminance) insertion type shown in Figs. The reduction in brightness and contrast can be suppressed compared to the device. However, the method does not provide sufficient effect to prevent motion blur. In addition, the contrast obtained by the above method is lower than that of a general conventional hold-type image display apparatus.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods, and respective gray level levels of the sub frame periods are determined according to the gray level of the input image signal, and the determined gray level is transferred to the image display unit. An image display apparatus is provided for performing image display by supplying the image display apparatus, wherein the image display apparatus provides a relatively large gradation level in a relatively central center subframe period closest to the temporal center or temporal center of one frame period. And a display control unit for supplying a gradation level which is sequentially lowered in a sub frame period sequentially distant from a relatively central sub frame period.

In one embodiment of the first aspect of the present invention, the gradation of the input image signal is relatively small, and the display control section supplies a relatively gradation level in all subframe periods; When the gray level of the input image signal is relatively large, the display control unit supplies the relatively largest gray level in all subframe periods.

In one embodiment of the first aspect of the present invention, the display control section controls the gradation level supplied in each subframe period such that the time integral of the luminance corresponding to the input image signal exhibits a predetermined luminance characteristic. Image display by the image display unit is performed.

According to the second aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on the image display portion in n subframe periods (n is an integer of 2 or more). . The image display apparatus includes a display control section for performing image display control of n sub-frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; In the temporal center of one frame period for image display or the relatively central sub frame period closest to the temporal center, the display control unit, in the image display unit, sums the total amount of time integrals of luminance in the n sub frame periods. Supplying an image signal having a relatively largest gradation level within a range not exceeding a luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal; When the total amount of time integration values of the luminance in the relatively central sub frame period does not reach the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal, the display control unit is configured to, in the image display unit, the previous sub frame before the central sub frame period. In each of the frame period and the subsequent sub frame period after the central sub frame period, the total amount of the time integration value of the luminance in the n sub frame periods does not exceed the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal. Supplying an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level; When the total amount of time integration values of luminance in the relatively central sub frame period, the previous sub frame period, and the subsequent sub frame period still does not reach the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal, the display control unit, In the image display unit, in each of the sub frame period before the previous sub frame period and the sub frame period after the subsequent sub frame period, the total amount of time integral values of luminance in the n sub frame periods corresponds to the gradation level of the input image signal. Supplying an image signal of a relatively gradation level within a range not exceeding a luminance level The display control unit repeats the above operation until the total amount of time integration values of luminance in all sub frame periods to which the image signal is supplied reaches a luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal; When the total amount reaches the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal, the display control section in the image display section has an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a relatively small gradation level in the remaining sub frame period. Supplies an image signal.

According to the third aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on the image display portion in n subframe periods (n is an odd number of 3 or more). The image display apparatus includes a display control section for performing image display control of n sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; The subframe period is referred to as a first subframe period, a second subframe period, ..., an nth subframe period from the earliest subframe period in time or from the latest subframe period in time; The sub frame period which becomes the temporal center of one frame period for image display is referred to as the m th sub frame period, and m = (n + 1) / 2; The number of (n + 1) / 2-threshold levels is provided for the gradation level of the input image signal, the threshold level being referred to as T1, T2, ... T [(n + 1) / 2] from the smallest threshold level. Becoming; When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to T1, the display control section is provided with an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the mth sub frame period, and another sub frame period. Supplying an image signal lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T1 and less than or equal to T2, the display control section instructs the image display section an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the m-th sub-frame period or an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level. , an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal in each of the (m-1) th subframe period and the (m + 1) th subframe period, and a predetermined value in another subframe period. Supply an image signal of a lower gradation level or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, the display control section respectively displays the mth subframe period, the (m-1) th subframe period, and the (m + 1) th subframe period. An image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the image signal or an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level, an input image signal in each of the (m-2) th subframe period and the (m + 2) th subframe period Supplying an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with a gradation level of < RTI ID = 0.0 > and < / RTI > When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than Tx-1 (x is an integer equal to or greater than 4) and less than or equal to Tx, the display control unit transmits the [m +] through the [m + (x-2)] th subframe period to the image display unit. (x-2)] in each of the sub frame periods, an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level, the [m + (x-1)] th subframe period through the [m + (x-1)] subframe period; (x-1)] in each of the sub frame periods, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal, and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value in another sub frame period or a relatively most The image signal of a small gradation level is supplied.

According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on the image display portion in n subframe periods (n is an even number of two or more). The image display apparatus includes a display control section for performing image display control of n sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; The sub frame period is referred to as a first sub frame period, a second sub frame period, ..., an nth sub frame period from the earliest sub frame period in time or from the latest sub frame period in time; The two sub frame periods closest to the temporal center of the one frame period for image display are referred to as the m1 sub frame period and the m2 sub frame period, m1 = n / 2, m2 = n / 2 + 1; The number of n / 2-threshold levels is provided for the gradation level of the input image signal, said threshold level being called T1, T2, ... T [n / 2] from the lowest threshold level; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than T1, the display control unit displays an image of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in each of the m1 subframe period and the m2 subframe period. A signal and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T1 and less than or equal to T2, the display control section is provided with an image signal of a gradation level greater than a predetermined value in each of the m1 subframe period and the m2 subframe period, or relative to the image display unit. The image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in each of the (m1-1) th subframe period and the (m2 + 1) th subframe period, Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, the display control section includes an mth subframe period, an m2th subframe period, an (m1-1) th subframe period, and an (m2 + 1) portion in the image display unit. ) An image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in each of the sub frame periods or an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level, the (m1-2) th subframe period and the (m2 + 2) subframe period. The image signal of the gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in each, and the image signal of the gradation level lower than the predetermined value or the image signal of the relatively small gradation level in the other sub frame periods is supplied, ; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than Tx-1 (x is an integer equal to or greater than 4) and less than or equal to Tx, the display control unit supplies the image display unit with the [m1- +] through the [m2 + (x-2)] th subframe period. (x-2)] in each of the sub frame periods, the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value or the image signal of the relatively largest gradation level, and the [m1] through the [m2 + (x-1)] subframe periods. (x-1)] in each of the sub frame periods, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal, and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value in another sub frame period or a relatively most The image signal of a small gradation level is supplied.

According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two sub frame periods. A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the display control section includes an image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, And supplies an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in the sub frame period β; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control section includes, in the image display section, an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the sub frame period α, or an image signal of a relatively gradation level, and The image signal of the gradation level increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period β is supplied.

According to a sixth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two sub frame periods. A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; Threshold levels, T1 and T2, of the gradation levels in the two subframe periods are defined, and the threshold level T2 is greater than the threshold level T1; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the display control section instructs the image display portion of the gradation level of the gradation level to be increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame period. supply an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a signal signal of a relatively small gradation level in β; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the display control section includes an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and Supplying an image signal having a gradation level lower than the gradation level supplied in the sub frame period β and increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α; When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T2, the display control section includes, in the image display portion, an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the sub frame period β, or an image signal of a relatively gradation level, And an image signal of a gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period β.

According to a seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two subframe periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; Threshold levels, T1 and T2, of the gradation levels in the two subframe periods are defined, and the threshold level T2 is greater than the threshold level T1; The gradation level L is uniquely determined; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the display control section instructs the image display portion of the gradation level of the gradation level to be increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame period. supply an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a signal signal of a relatively small gradation level in β; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the display control section is provided with an image signal of the gradation level L in the sub frame period α, and the input image in the sub frame period β. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the signal; when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T2, the display control unit is further configured to provide an image display unit with an input image signal in the sub frame period? The image signal of the gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level, and the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value in the sub frame period β, or the image signal of the relatively gradation level is supplied.

According to an eighth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two subframe periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; The display control unit generates an image of an intermediate state in time through estimation based on the images of two frames which are continuously input; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; In the sub frame period α, when the gradation level of the input image signal is lower than or equal to a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the display control unit sends an image signal having a gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display unit. Supply; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display section with an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively gradation level; In the sub-frame period β, when the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state is equal to or less than the threshold level, the display control section instructs the image display unit an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level. Supplying; When the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state is larger than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display unit with an gradation level image signal which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state. .

According to a ninth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display portion in two sub frame periods. A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; In the sub frame period α, when the gradation level of the input image signal is lower than or equal to a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the display control unit supplies an image signal having a gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display unit. and; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display section with an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively gradation level; In the sub frame period β, when the average value of the gradation level of the input image signal and the gradation level of the image signal input one frame or one frame after the current frame period is equal to or less than the threshold level, the display control unit Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level; When the average value is larger than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display unit with an image signal having a gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the average value.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first, second, ..., n-th subframe periods is L1, L2, ... Ln, respectively. When the sub frame period of one frame period, which becomes the temporal center or is closest to the temporal center, is called the jth sub frame period, the display control unit

L [j-i] ≧ L [j− (i + 1)];

L [j + i] ≥ L [j + (i + 1)], where i is an integer greater than or equal to 0 and less than j

Set the upper limit to satisfy.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the image display section has a gradation of the input image signal so that the relationship between the time integration value of the luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period after being increased or decreased in accordance with the level is set.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the image display apparatus further includes a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, wherein the display control unit is configured by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit. The gamma luminance characteristic set externally can be changed.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity, and according to the temperature detected by the temperature detector, The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level is set.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the gradation level assigned to the central sub frame period in one frame period is one frame period. It is higher than the gradation level allocated to another sub frame period at the end.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the luminance level of the image signal allocated to the central sub frame period in one frame period is 1; It is higher than the luminance level of the image signal allocated to another sub frame period at the end of the frame period.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the temporal center of gravity of the temporal integral of luminance in the plurality of sub frame periods moves within one sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the first aspect of the present invention, the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the initial sub frame period is equal to or less than half the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the subsequent sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths from each other.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the upper limits of the gradation levels of the image signals supplied in the first, second, ..., n-th sub-frame periods are respectively L1, L2, ... Ln. Is called; When the sub frame period that is the temporal center or closest to the temporal center of one frame period is referred to as the j th sub frame period,

The display control unit,

L [j-i] ≧ L [j− (i + 1)];

L [j + i] ≥ L [j + (i + 1)], where i is an integer greater than or equal to 0 and less than j

Set the upper limit to satisfy *.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the image display portion of the input image signal is configured such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level is set.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting gamma luminance characteristics is further included, and the display control unit is gamma luminance set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit. You can change the properties.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or the vicinity thereof, wherein the display controller is further configured to adjust the input image signal according to the temperature detected by the temperature detector. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level is set.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the gradation level assigned to the central sub frame period in one frame period is one frame period. It is higher than the gradation level allocated to another sub frame period at the end.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the luminance level of the image signal allocated to the central sub frame period in one frame period is 1; It is higher than the luminance level of the image signal allocated to another sub frame period at the end of the frame period.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the temporal center of gravity of the temporal integral of luminance in the plurality of sub frame periods moves within one sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment according to the second aspect of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths from each other.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the mth sub frame period is longer than other sub frame periods.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first, second, ..., n-th sub-frame periods is set to L1, L2, ... Ln, respectively. Is called; When the sub frame period that is the temporal center or closest to the temporal center of one frame period is referred to as the j th sub frame period,

The display control unit,

L [j-i] ≧ L [j− (i + 1)];

L [j + i] ≥ L [j + (i + 1)], where i is an integer greater than or equal to 0 and less than j

Set the upper limit to satisfy.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the image display apparatus further includes a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, and the display control unit is externally set by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit. You can change the gamma luminance characteristics set in.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the image display apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity, and according to the temperature detected by the temperature detector, the display control unit. Sets a threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and also adjusts the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period after being increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal. Set.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit is displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance level and the luminance level displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, when n is 3, the display control unit

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

Controlled by the timing control section to output data read from the frame data storage section (i) transfer of data from the line data storage section to the frame data storage section, or (ii) 1/4 frame before A frame memory data selection section for selecting to output data read out from the frame data storage section as input before 3/4 frame;

Controlled by the timing control unit to select (i) outputting data from the line data storage unit, or (ii) outputting data supplied from the frame memory data selection unit as input before 3/4 frame, A gray scale conversion source selector;

A first gradation conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is relatively larger than or greater than a predetermined value or that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of an input image signal part;

A second gradation conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the gradation conversion source selector to a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal. part; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the gradation level allocated to the central sub frame period in one frame period is one frame period. It is higher than the gradation level allocated to another sub frame period at the end.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the luminance level of the image signal allocated to the central sub frame period in one frame period is It is higher than the luminance level of the image signal allocated to another sub frame period at the end of one frame period.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the temporal center of gravity of the temporal integral of luminance in the plurality of sub frame periods moves within one sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the third aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths from each other.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the upper limits of the gradation levels of the image signals supplied in the first, second, ..., n-th sub-frame periods are respectively L1, L2, ... Ln. Is called; When the sub frame period that is the temporal center or closest to the temporal center of one frame period is referred to as the j th sub frame period,

The display control unit,

L [j-i] ≧ L [j− (i + 1)];

L [j + i] ≥ L [j + (i + 1)], where i is an integer greater than or equal to 0 and less than j

Set the upper limit to satisfy.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting gamma luminance characteristics is further included, and a display control unit is gamma luminance set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit. You can change the properties.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of or near the display panel, wherein the display controller is further configured for each subframe period in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detector. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, in the case where the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control section is displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance level and the luminance level displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the gradation level allocated to the central sub frame period in one frame period is one frame period. It is higher than the gradation level allocated to another sub frame period at the end.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, when the plurality of sub frame periods are three or more sub frame periods, the luminance level of the image signal allocated to the central sub frame period in one frame period is It is higher than the luminance level of the image signal allocated to another sub frame period at the end of one frame period.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the temporal center of gravity of the temporal integral of luminance in the plurality of sub frame periods moves within one sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, when the response time of the image display unit with respect to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display unit with respect to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period? Is allocated to a second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods; When the response time of the image display unit for the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit for the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is assigned to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. .

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the upper limit L1 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to another sub frame period. ,

The display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy the relationship L1? L2.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting gamma luminance characteristics is further included, and a display control unit is gamma luminance set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit. You can change the properties.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity.

According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period is set.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ;

A first gradation converting section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the line data storage section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of an input image signal ;

A second gray level conversion for converting the gray level of the image signal from the frame memory data selector to a relatively small level or a lower than a predetermined value or to a gray level which is increased or decreased by the gray level of the input image signal; part; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level higher than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value. Is a gradation level lower than 2% when the relatively small gradation level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment of the present invention, each pixel portion contains one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, when the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T1 or less than the threshold level T2, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α and The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period β is set so that the difference between the gradation levels is constant or the difference between the luminance level in the sub frame period α and the luminance level in the sub frame period β is constant.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level of the image signal allocated to the initial sub frame period is equal to or less than half the gradation level of the image signal allocated to the subsequent sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the gradation level and the sub frame period of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α. In the gradation level of the image signal supplied in β, the relation between the gradation levels is set by a function, or the relation between the luminance levels in the sub frame period α and the luminance levels in the sub frame period β It is set to be set by.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, when the response time of the image display unit with respect to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display unit with respect to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period? Is allocated to a second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods;

When the response time of the image display unit for the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit for the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is assigned to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. .

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, when the upper limit L1 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the other sub frame periods,

The display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy the relationship L1? L2.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic,

The display controller may change the gamma luminance characteristic set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity.

According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period is set.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the case where the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit is

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ;

A first gradation converting section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the line data storage section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of an input image signal ;

A second gray level conversion for converting the gray level of the image signal from the frame memory data selector to a relatively small level or a lower than a predetermined value or to a gray level which is increased or decreased by the gray level of the input image signal; part; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the gradation level and the sub frame period of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in β is set so that the difference between the gradation levels is constant or the difference between the luminance level in the sub frame period α and the luminance level in the sub frame period β is constant.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the initial sub frame period is less than half of the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the subsequent sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the gradation level and the sub frame period of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α. In the gradation level of the image signal supplied in β, the relation between the gradation levels is set by a function, or the relation between the luminance levels in the sub frame period α and the luminance levels in the sub frame period β It is set to be set by.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the response time of the image display unit to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display unit to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period? Is allocated to a second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods;

When the response time of the image display unit for the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit for the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is assigned to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. .

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the upper limit L1 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the other sub frame periods,

The display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy the relationship L1? L2.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the image display apparatus further includes a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic,

The display controller may change the gamma luminance characteristic set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity.

According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period is set.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, in the case where the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the display control unit is

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ;

A first gradation converting section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the line data storage section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of an input image signal ;

A second gray level conversion for converting the gray level of the image signal from the frame memory data selector to a relatively small level or a lower than a predetermined value or to a gray level which is increased or decreased by the gray level of the input image signal; part; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relative luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%, the gray level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, when the response time of the image display unit with respect to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display unit with the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period? Is allocated to a second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods;

When the response time of the image display unit for the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit for the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is assigned to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. .

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, when the upper limit L1 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the other sub frame periods,

The display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy the relationship L1? L2.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further comprises a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic,

The display controller may change the gamma luminance characteristic set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity.

According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period is set.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, in the case where the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit is

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ;

A first gradation converting section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the line data storage section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of an input image signal ;

A second gradation level for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is relatively smallest or lower than a predetermined value or that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal. A conversion unit; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit is

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A first multiple line data memory unit and a second multiple line data memory unit for temporarily storing image signals of a plurality of horizontal lines;

Controlled by the timing control section, and (i) transfer of data from the line data storage section to the frame data storage section, or (ii) one frame prior to being read from the frame data storage section into the first plurality of line data memory sections. A frame memory data selection unit for selecting data transfer and transfer of data read out from the frame data storage unit to a second multi-line data storage unit as input two frames before;

An intermediate image generation unit for estimating and generating an image of an intermediate state in time between the image signal from the first multiple line data memory unit and the image signal from the second multiple line data memory unit;

A temporary memory data selection unit controlled by the timing control unit to select an image signal from a first multi-line data memory unit or an image signal from a second multi-line data memory unit;

A first gradation conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the temporary memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of an input image signal part;

A second gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the intermediate image generation section to a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal. ; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%, the gray level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths from each other.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, when the response time of the image display unit to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display unit to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period? Is allocated to a second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods;

When the response time of the image display unit for the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit for the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is assigned to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. .

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods,

The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the display control section sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, when the upper limit L1 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the other sub frame periods,

The display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy the relationship L1? L2.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the display control section each subframe period such that the relationship between the time integration value of luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic during one frame period. A threshold level which serves as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to is set, and also the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic,

The display controller may change the gamma luminance characteristic set externally by the gamma luminance characteristic setting unit.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the apparatus further includes a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity.

According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period is set.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, in the case where the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit displays in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels to be used and the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit is

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A frame memory data selection unit controlled by the timing control unit to select to transfer data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit or to output data read out from the frame data storage unit as input one frame before;

A first gradation converting section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the line data storage section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of an input image signal ;

A second gray level conversion for converting the gray level of the image signal from the frame memory data selector to a relatively small level or a lower than a predetermined value or to a gray level which is increased or decreased by the gray level of the input image signal; part; And

And an output data selector controlled by the timing controller to select an image signal from the first gradation converter or an image signal from the second gradation converter, and to supply the selected image signal to the image display. .

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit is

A timing controller;

A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal;

A first multiple line data memory unit and a second multiple line data memory unit for temporarily storing image signals of a plurality of horizontal lines;

Controlled by the timing control section, and (i) transfer of data from the line data storage section to the frame data storage section, or (ii) one frame prior to being read from the frame data storage section into the first plurality of line data memory sections. A frame memory data selector for selecting data transfer and transfer of data read out from the frame data storage to a second multi-line data memory, input two frames before;

A gradation level average section for calculating an average value of the gradation level of the image signal from the first plural line data memory section and the gradation level of the image signal from the second plural line data memory section and supplying the average value to the second gradation conversion section;

A temporary memory data selection section controlled by the timing control section for selecting an image signal from a first plurality of line data memory sections or an image signal from a second plurality of line data memory sections;

A first gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the temporary memory data selection section to a gradation level that is relatively larger than or greater than a predetermined value or that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal ;

A second gradation converting unit for converting the gradation level of the image signal from the intermediate image generating unit to a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal; And

And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section for selecting an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section and supplying the selected image signal to the image display section. .

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 90% when the relative luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%, the gray level is lower than 10%.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, The lower gradation level is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level lower than 10% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is For example, when the relatively small gradation level is 0%, the gradation level is lower than 2%.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level larger than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. The lower gradation level is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the relatively smallest luminance level is 0%.

In one embodiment according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen.

In one embodiment of the present invention, each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels.

According to a tenth aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention is provided.

According to an eleventh aspect of the present invention, an image display apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, and

There is provided a liquid crystal TV comprising a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control section of the image display apparatus.

According to a twelfth aspect of the present invention, an image display apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, and

A liquid crystal monitor device is provided which includes a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device.

According to a thirteenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display unit in n subframe periods (n is an integer of 2 or more). , The method,

In a temporal center of one frame period for image display or a relatively central subframe period closest to the temporal center, the total amount of time integral values of luminance in the n subframe periods is added to the image display portion of the input image signal. Supplying an image signal having a relatively largest gradation level within a range not exceeding a luminance level corresponding to the gradation level;

When the total amount of temporal integrals of the luminance of the relatively central sub frame period does not reach the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal, the image display section shows the previous sub frame period before the central sub frame period and the relatively central one. In each of the subsequent sub frame periods after the sub frame period, the total amount of the temporal integral of the luminance in the n sub frame periods is relatively large within the range not exceeding the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level;

When the total amount of time integration values of luminance in the relatively central sub frame period, the previous sub frame period, and the subsequent sub frame period still does not reach the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal, In each of the sub frame period before the sub frame period and the sub frame period after the subsequent sub frame period, the total amount of time integration values of the luminance in the n sub frame periods does not exceed the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal. Supplying an image signal having a relatively largest gradation level within a range that does not occur;

Repeating the above operation until the total amount of time integration values of the luminance in all the sub frame periods to which the image signal is supplied reaches the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal; And

When the total amount reaches the luminance level corresponding to the gradation level of the input image signal, the image display unit is supplied with an image signal having a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal having a relatively small gradation level in the remaining sub frame periods. It includes a step.

According to a fourteenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on the image display portion in n subframe periods (n is an odd number of 3 or more). ,

The subframe period is referred to as a first subframe period, a second subframe period, ..., an nth subframe period from the earliest subframe period in time or from the latest subframe period in time; The sub frame period which becomes the temporal center of one frame period for image display is referred to as the m th sub frame period, and m = (n + 1) / 2;

The number of (n + 1) / 2-threshold levels is provided for the gradation level of the input video signal, and the threshold level is referred to as T1, T2, ... T [(n + 1) / 2] from the lowest threshold level. ;

The method,

When the gradation level of the input video signal is equal to or less than T1, the image display unit has an gradation level image signal which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the mth sub frame period, and a predetermined value in another sub frame period. Supplying a lower image signal or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level;

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than T1 and less than or equal to T2, the display control section instructs the image display section an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the mth sub-frame period or an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level. In the (m-1) th subframe period and the (m + 1) th subframe period, the image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal, and the other subframe period. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level;

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, a predetermined value in each of the mth subframe period, the (m-1) th subframe period, and the (m + 1) th subframe period is displayed on the image display unit. Depending on the image signal of the larger gradation level or the image signal of the relatively largest gradation level, the gradation level of the input image signal in each of the (m-2) th subframe period and the (m + 2) th subframe period Supplying an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased, and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period; And

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than Tx-1 (x is an integer equal to or greater than 4) and less than or equal to Tx, the image display unit receives the [m- (x-2) through the [m + (x-2)] th sub-frame periods. [M- (x-1) through the [m + (x-1)] sub-frame period in each of the sub-frame periods. )] An image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of an input image signal in each sub frame period, and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period. Supplying an image signal of a.

According to a fifteenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on the image display portion in n subframe periods (n is an even number of two or more). ,

The subframe period is referred to as a first frame period, a second frame period, ..., an nth subframe period from the earliest subframe period in time or from the latest subframe period in time; The two sub frame periods closest to the temporal center of one frame period for image display are referred to as the m1 sub frame period and the m2 sub frame period, m1 = n + / 2, m2 = n / 2 + 1;

The number of n / 2-threshold levels is provided for the gradation level of the input video signal, said threshold level being called T1, T2, ... T [n / 2] from the lowest threshold level;

The method,

An image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in each of the m1th sub frame period and the m2th subframe period when the gradation level of the input video signal is equal to or less than T1, and Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period;

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than T1 and less than or equal to T2, the image display section has an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in each of the m1 subframe period and the m2 subframe period, or a relatively largest gradation level. The image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in each of the (m1-1) th subframe period and the (m2 + 1) th subframe period Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in a frame period;

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, the image display unit displays the m1 sub frame period, the m2 sub frame period, the (m1-1) sub frame period, and the (m2 + 1) sub frame period. In each of the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value or the image signal of the relatively largest gradation level, each of the (m1-2) th subframe period and the (m2 + 2) th subframe period, respectively. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal, and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period; And

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than Tx-1 (x is an integer greater than or equal to 4) and less than or equal to Tx, the image display unit receives the [m1- (x-2) through the [m2 + (x-2)] subframe periods. [M1- (x-1) through the image signal of the gradation level larger than a predetermined value or the image signal of the relatively largest gradation level in each of the sub frame periods, through the [m2 + (x-1)] th subframe period. )] An image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of an input image signal in each sub frame period, and an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a relatively small gradation level in another sub frame period. Supplying an image signal of a.

According to a sixteenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two sub frame periods.

One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta;

The method,

When the gradation level of the input video signal is equal to or less than a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the image display unit has an gradation level image signal that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in a frame period β; And

When the gradation level of the input video signal is larger than the threshold level, the image display section includes an image signal having a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the sub frame period α, or an image signal having a relatively largest gradation level, and a sub frame period β. And supplying an image signal of a gradation level which is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal in the present invention.

According to the seventeenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in the image display portion in two sub frame periods,

One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; Threshold levels T1 and T2 of the gradation levels in the two subframe periods are defined, and threshold level T2 is greater than threshold level T1;

The method,

When the gradation level of the input video signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the image display section shows an image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and in the sub frame period β. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level; And

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the image display unit has an gradation level image signal that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame period. supplying an image signal having a gradation level lower than the gradation level supplied in β and increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α; And

When the gradation level of the input video signal is larger than the threshold level T2, the image display section includes an image signal having a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the sub frame period α, or an image signal having a relatively large gradation level and a sub frame period β. An image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal, and is lower than the gradation level supplied in the sub frame period α and increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period β. And supplying an image signal of a gradation level.

According to an eighteenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two sub frame periods,

One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; Threshold levels, T1 and T2, of the gradation level in the two subframe periods are defined, and threshold level T2 is greater than threshold level T1; The gradation level L is uniquely determined;

The method,

When the gradation level of the input video signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the image display section shows an image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and in the sub frame period β. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level;

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the display control section is provided with an image display part of the gradation level L in the sub frame period α and an input image in the sub frame period β. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the signal; And

When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than the threshold level T2, the display control section further includes, in the image display section, an image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame. Supplying an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively largest gradation level in a period β.

According to a nineteenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in an image display portion in two sub frame periods,

One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta;

The method,

In the sub frame period α, when the gradation level of the input video signal is lower than or equal to a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the image display unit supplies an image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal; When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit, comprising: supplying, to the image display unit, an image signal having a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal having a relatively largest gradation level; And

In the sub frame period β, when the gradation level of the input video signal in the intermediate state is lower than or equal to the threshold level, an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level is supplied to the image display unit. ; When the gradation level of the input video signal in the intermediate state is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit sends an image signal of the gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state. Supplying.

According to a twentieth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image display method for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed in the image display portion in two sub frame periods.

One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta;

The method,

In the sub frame period α, when the gradation level of the input video signal is lower than or equal to a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the image display unit supplies an image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal; When the gradation level of the input video signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit, comprising: supplying, to the image display unit, an image signal having a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal having a relatively largest gradation level; And

In the sub frame period β, when the average value of the gradation level of the input video signal in the current frame period and the gradation level of the input image signal before or after one frame is less than or equal to the threshold level, the gradation lower than the predetermined value is displayed on the image display unit. Supply an image signal of a level or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level; When the average value is larger than the threshold level, the display control unit includes supplying, to the image display unit, an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the average value.

According to a twenty first aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the thirteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to a twenty second aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium storing a computer program according to the twenty first aspect of the present invention.

According to a twenty-third aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method for supplying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion for display, wherein the frame period includes at least the? Sub frame period and? Sub frame period. Divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

And supplying the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display section, wherein when both the moving object section and the background section have a luminance level of less than 50% of the highest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is a plurality of plural levels. When at least β sub frame period of the sub frame period is supplied, and both the moving object portion and the background portion are at least 50% of the luminance level of the highest luminance, the luminance level of the largest value is the highest among the plurality of sub frame periods. It is supplied at least in the? Sub frame period.

In one embodiment according to the twenty third aspect of the present invention, a plurality of sub frame periods are divided into two sub frame periods.

According to a twenty-fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a display method comprising the method of the twenty-third aspect of the present invention, further comprising displaying the input image signal at the supplied gradation level.

According to a twenty fifth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a display method including the method of the one embodiment according to the twenty third aspect of the present invention, further comprising displaying the input image signal at the supplied gradation level.

In one embodiment of the twenty-fifth aspect of the present invention, the? Sub frame period is set when the response time of the image display unit with respect to the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the image display unit with respect to the increase in the luminance level. One of the two sub frame periods is allocated to the second sub frame period;

When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the? Sub frame period is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

According to a twenty sixth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a device for performing the method of the twenty-fifth aspect of the present invention, wherein the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is increased in the image display portion. Is relatively shorter than the response time, and? Sub frame period is allocated to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

According to a twenty-seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided a device for performing the method of the twenty-fifth aspect of the present invention, wherein an image display unit is provided for the response time of the image display unit to the decrease in the luminance level to increase in the luminance level. Is longer than the response time of and subframe period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

According to a twenty eighth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the twenty third aspect of the present invention.

According to a twenty-ninth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the first embodiment of the twenty-third aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirtieth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the twenty fourth aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirty first aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the twenty fifth aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirty second aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to an embodiment of the twenty second aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirty third aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium having a computer program according to the twenty eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirty-fourth aspect of the present invention, a computer-readable recording medium having a computer program according to the twenty-ninth aspect of the present invention is provided.

According to a thirty fifth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium having a computer program according to the thirtieth aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirty sixth aspect of the present invention, a computer-readable recording medium having a computer program according to the thirty-third aspect of the present invention is provided.

According to a thirty seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium having a computer program according to the thirty second aspect of the present invention.

According to a thirty eighth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method for supplying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion for display, wherein the frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

Supplying the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display section, wherein when the luminance level of the moving object portion supplied in the first sub frame period is a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, The luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also lower than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, and the luminance level of the moving object part supplied in the first sub frame period is the second sub frame. When the luminance level is relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the period, the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period also becomes the luminance level relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period.

In one embodiment of the thirty eighth aspect of the present invention, the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods.

According to a thirty third aspect of the present invention, there is provided a display method comprising the method of the thirty eighth aspect of the present invention, further comprising displaying the input image signal at the supplied gradation level.

According to a fortyth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a display method comprising the method of the thirty-ninth aspect of the present invention, further comprising displaying the input image signal at the supplied gradation level.

According to a forty-first aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty-eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty-second aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to an embodiment of the thirty-eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty third aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty third aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty fourth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty fourth aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty-fifth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty-first aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty sixth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty-second aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty-seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty-third aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty eighth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the forty-fourth aspect of the present invention.

According to a forty-ninth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period includes at least a plurality of subframe periods and a? Subframe period. Divided into sub frame periods of

Means for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

Means for displaying an image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein when the moving object portion and the background portion are at a luminance level of less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is plural. When the luminance level is supplied in at least the? Sub frame period of the sub frame period, and the moving object portion and the background portion are at least 50% of the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the largest value is among the plurality of sub frame periods. It is supplied in at least β sub frame period.

In one embodiment of the forty-ninth aspect of the present invention, the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the? Sub frame period when the response time of the means for displaying the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the means for displaying the increase in the luminance level. One of the two sub frame periods is allocated to the second sub frame period;

When the response time of the means for displaying against the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the means for displaying against the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. Is assigned to.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the response time of the means for displaying the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the means for displaying the increase in the luminance level, and the? It is allocated to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the response time of the means for displaying on the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the means for displaying on the increase in the luminance level, and the sub frame period α is two subs. It is allocated to the first sub frame period in the frame period.

According to a fifty aspect of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

Means for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

Means for displaying an input image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein the luminance level of the moving object portion supplied in the first sub frame period is a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. The luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also lower than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, and the luminance level of the moving object part supplied in the first sub frame period is set to the second sub frame period. When the luminance level is relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the frame period, the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period also becomes the luminance level relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods.

According to a fifty-first aspect of the present invention, an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period includes a plurality of sub frames including at least an? Sub frame period and a? Sub frame period. Divided into frame periods,

A display control unit suitable for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

A luminance level of the relatively smallest value, when the luminance level is less than 50% of the largest luminance, both the moving object portion and the background portion, suitable for displaying image signals at the supplied gradation level. When the at least? Sub frame period of the plurality of sub frame periods is supplied, and the moving object portion and the background portion have a luminance level of at least 50% of the largest luminance, the luminance level of the largest relative value is plural. It is supplied to at least β sub frame period of the sub frame period.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment of the present invention, when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the β sub frame period is two sub-frames. Assigned to a second sub frame period of the period;

When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the? Sub frame period is two sub-frames when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level. It is allocated to the second sub frame period in the period.

In one embodiment of the present invention, when the response of the image display unit to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is the first of the two sub frame periods. It is allocated to one sub frame period.

According to a fifty-second aspect of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

A display control unit suitable for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

An image display portion suitable for displaying an image signal with the supplied gray level, wherein the luminance level of the moving object portion supplied in the first sub frame period is a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. When the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also lower than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, the luminance level of the moving object part supplied in the first sub frame period is set to the second. When the luminance level is relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the sub frame period, the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period also becomes the luminance level relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods.

According to a fifty-third aspect of the present invention, for displaying, a method of supplying an image of an input image signal is projected, one frame period is divided into a plurality of subframes,

Supplying the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display unit, wherein the relatively smallest luminance value is supplied to the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes, The luminance value is supplied to at least one relatively center of the plurality of subframes.

In one embodiment of this invention, when the gradation level is at least 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one relatively central subframe.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is supplied to the subframe that is relatively far from the plurality of relatively central subframes. do.

In the third embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the subframe having the relatively smallest luminance level is farthest from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied to.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a plurality of sub frame periods is odd, a relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one central sub frame, and when a plurality of sub frame periods is even, a relatively largest The luminance value is supplied to at least two relatively central subframes.

According to a fifty-fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a display method comprising the method of the fifty-third aspect of the present invention, further comprising displaying the input image signal at the supplied gradation level.

According to a fifty fifth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty third aspect of the present invention.

According to a fifty sixth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the first embodiment of the fifty third aspect of the present invention.

According to a fifty seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the second embodiment of the fifty third aspect of the present invention.

According to a fifty eighth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the third embodiment of the fifty third aspect of the present invention.

According to a fifty-ninth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fourth embodiment of the fifty-third aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixtyth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty-fourth aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty sixth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty fifth aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty sixth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty sixth aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty third aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty fourth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty ninth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fifty-ninth aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method for supplying an image of an input image signal for display, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of subframes,

Supplying the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display unit, wherein the luminance value of the gradation level is relatively low relative to the subframe outward from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes.

In the first embodiment of this invention, when the gradation level is at least 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance value is supplied to the relatively central one of the at least one of the plurality of subframes.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the subframe having the relatively smallest luminance level is relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied to.

In the third embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the subframe having the relatively smallest luminance level is farthest from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied to.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a plurality of sub frame periods is odd, a relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one central sub frame, and when a plurality of sub frame periods is even, a relatively largest The luminance value is supplied to at least two relatively central subframes.

According to a sixty eighth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a display method comprising the method of the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention, further comprising displaying the input image signal at the supplied gradation level.

According to a sixty seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventieth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the first embodiment of the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the second embodiment of the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy-second aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the third embodiment of the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the fourth embodiment of the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy fourth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the sixty eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy ninth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the sixty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a sixty sixth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the seventy seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the seventy seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy eighth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the seventy-eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to a seventy seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the seventy seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to an eightyth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute a method according to the seventy-fourth aspect of the present invention.

According to an eighty-first aspect of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of subframes,

Means for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal, and

Means for displaying an image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein the relatively smallest luminance value is supplied to the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes, The luminance value is supplied to a relatively central one of at least one of the plurality of subframes.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is at least 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one relatively central subframe.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the third embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a plurality of sub frame periods is odd, a relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one central sub frame, and when a plurality of sub frame periods is even, a relatively largest luminance Is fed to at least two relatively central subframes.

According to an eighty-eighth aspect of the present invention, an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

A display control unit suitable for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

A relatively small luminance value is supplied to a subframe relatively far from a relatively central one of a plurality of subframes, the image display portion being suitable for displaying an image signal at the supplied gradation level, and A display device is provided in which the largest luminance value is supplied to a relatively central one of at least one of a plurality of subframes.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is at least 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one relatively central subframe.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the third embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a plurality of sub frame periods is odd, a relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one central sub frame, and when a plurality of sub frame periods is even, a relatively largest luminance Value is fed to at least two relatively central subframes.

According to an eighty third aspect of the present invention, an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

Means for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

Means for displaying an input image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein the luminance value of the gradation level is relatively low relative to the subframe outward from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes; Is provided.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is at least 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance value is supplied to the relatively central of at least one of the plurality of subframes.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied to.

In the third embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a plurality of sub frame periods is odd, a relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one central sub frame, and when a plurality of sub frame periods is even, a relatively largest luminance Is fed to at least two relatively central subframes.

According to an eighty-eighth aspect of the present invention, an apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods,

A display control section suitable for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And

An image display section suitable for displaying an image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein the luminance value of the gradation level is relatively low relative to the subframe outward from a relatively central one of a plurality of subframes; An apparatus is provided.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is at least 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively largest luminance value is supplied to the relatively central of at least one of the plurality of subframes.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the third embodiment of the present invention, when the gradation level is less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is placed in the subframe relatively far from the relatively central one of the plurality of subframes. Supplied.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a plurality of sub frame periods is odd, a relatively largest luminance value is supplied to at least one central sub frame, and when a plurality of sub frame periods is even, a relatively largest luminance Value is fed to at least two relatively central subframes.

A computer program for causing a computer to execute the image display method according to the fifteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to an eighty-sixth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer-readable recording medium on which a computer program according to the eighty-fifth aspect of the present invention is stored.

According to an eighty seventh aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the fifteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to an eighty eighth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium having a computer program stored therein according to the eighty seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to an 89th aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the sixteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninetyth aspect of the present invention, a computer-readable recording medium having stored thereon a computer program according to the 89th aspect of the present invention.

According to a nineteenth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the seventeenth aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninety ninth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium having stored thereon a computer program according to the nineteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninety third aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the eighteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninety ninth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer readable recording medium having a computer program stored therein according to the ninety third aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninety ninth aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the nineteenth aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninety-sixth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a computer-readable recording medium on which a computer program according to the ninetieth aspect of the present invention is stored.

According to a 97th aspect of the present invention, a computer program for allowing a computer to execute an image display method according to the twentieth aspect of the present invention.

According to a ninety ninth aspect of the present invention, a computer-readable recording medium having a computer program according to the ninety seventh aspect of the present invention stored therein.

According to a ninety ninth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device for performing image display on a screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention.

According to the 100th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a second aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 101st aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a second aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 102nd aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the second aspect of the present invention.

According to a 103rd aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a third aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 104 aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a third aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 105th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to a third aspect of the present invention.

According to the 106th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a fourth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 107th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a fourth aspect of the present invention, and

And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 108th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the fourth aspect of the present invention.

According to the 109th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a fifth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to the 110th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a fifth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to an eleventh aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the fifth aspect of the present invention.

According to the 112th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a sixth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to aspect 113 of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a sixth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 114th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to a seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to an 115th aspect of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a seventh aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to embodiment 116 of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a seventh aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to an eleventh aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the seventh aspect of the present invention.

According to embodiment 118 of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to an eighth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to embodiment 119 of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to an eighth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 120th aspect of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to an eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to aspect 121 of the present invention

An image display apparatus according to a ninth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal TV including a tuner unit for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control unit of the image display device.

According to embodiment 122 of the present invention,

An image display apparatus according to a ninth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in the display control unit of the image display device.

According to a 123th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an image display apparatus according to the ninth aspect of the present invention.

According to embodiment 124 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the fifty-first aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal television including a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control section of the device for displaying.

According to embodiment 125 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the fifty-first aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the device for displaying.

According to a 126th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an apparatus for displaying in accordance with a 51st aspect of the present invention.

According to embodiment 127 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to a fifty second aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal television including a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control section of the device for displaying.

According to a 128th aspect of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the fifty second aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the device for displaying.

According to a 129th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an apparatus for displaying according to a 52nd aspect of the present invention.

According to an aspect 130 of the invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to an eighty eighth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal television including a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control section of the device for displaying.

According to embodiment 131 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to an eighty eighth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the device for displaying.

According to a 132th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of an image display portion of an apparatus for displaying according to an 82nd aspect of the present invention.

According to embodiment 133 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the 84th aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal television including a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a display control section of the device for displaying.

According to embodiment 134 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the 84th aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the device for displaying.

According to a thirty-fifth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device for performing image display on the display screen of the image display portion of the apparatus for displaying according to the eighty-eighth aspect of the present invention.

According to embodiment 136 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the forty-ninth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal television comprising a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to embodiment 137 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the forty-ninth aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device comprising a signal processing portion for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal, in the means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to a 138th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a screen of the means for displaying the apparatus for displaying according to the 49th aspect of the present invention.

According to embodiment 139 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the fifty aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal television comprising a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to the 140th aspect of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the fifty aspect of the invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device comprising a signal processing portion for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal, in the means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to embodiment 141 of the present invention,

According to a fifty aspect of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of the display means for displaying the device.

According to aspect 142 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the eighty eighth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal television comprising a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to embodiment 143 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the eighty eighth aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing portion for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to aspect 144 of the present invention,

According to an eighty-eighth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of the display means for displaying the device.

According to embodiment 145 of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the thirty third aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal television comprising a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to a supply means of the apparatus for displaying.

According to a 146th aspect of the present invention,

An apparatus for displaying according to the eighty third aspect of the present invention, and

And a liquid crystal monitor device including a signal processing portion for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a means for supplying the device for displaying.

According to a 147th aspect of the present invention, an electronic apparatus for performing image display on a display screen of the display means of the apparatus for displaying according to the 83rd aspect of the present invention.

According to the apparatus, method and program of the present invention, when the luminance level of the moving object supplied in the first sub frame period is a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, The luminance level of the supplied background is also a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, and the luminance level of the moving object supplied in the first sub frame period is supplied in the second sub frame period. When the level is relatively larger than the level, the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. Therefore, the deterioration of the image quality caused by the motion blur, which is a problem of the conventional hold image display apparatus, can be suppressed. In addition, the deterioration of the moving image quality due to the motion blur generated in a conventional conventional hold-type image display device can be alleviated. Even if the display is performed at the maximum gradation level, the decrease in the maximum luminance and contrast occurring in the minimum (luminance) insertion system (each one frame period includes the minimum luminance period) can be suppressed.

In the following, the functions of the present invention provided by the above-described structure will be described.

According to the present invention, in the hold-type image display apparatus for setting a plurality of subframe periods in one frame period, the gradation level of each subframe period is: while the decrease in maximum luminance or contrast is suppressed, while the temporal center of display brightness is suppressed. The position is controlled so as not to move in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. Therefore, the quality of the moving image is prevented from being lowered due to the movement blur.

For example, when the image display of one frame is performed by the sum of the time-integrated values of the luminance displayed on the image display unit in n subframe periods (n is an integer of 2 or more), the maximum or sufficiently high gradation level ( The gradation level larger than the predetermined value) is supplied to the subframe period at or near the temporal center position of one frame period, in a range in which the gradation level of the input image signal does not exceed the corresponding luminance level. When the gradation level of the input image signal is reached, the minimum or sufficiently low gradation level (gradation level lower than the predetermined value) is supplied in the remaining subframe periods.

When n is an odd number of 3 or more, the maximum or sufficiently high gradation level (greater than the predetermined gradation level) is the subframe period (mth subframe period, m = (n + 1) / 2) at the temporal center position. Supplied to. The gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the subframe periods before and after the center subframe period. The minimum or sufficiently low gray level (gradation level lower than the predetermined value) is supplied in the remaining subframe periods. The gradation level supplied in each subframe period is determined by whether the gradation level of the input image signal is higher than the threshold level (T).

When n is an even number greater than or equal to 2, a subframe period (m1 subframe period and m2 subframe period in which the maximum or sufficiently high gradation level (greater than a predetermined value) is closest to the temporal center position or the temporal center position. , Where m1 = n / 2 and m2 = n / 2 + 1). The gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the subframe periods before and after the center subframe period. The minimum or sufficiently low gray level (gradation level lower than the predetermined value) is supplied in the remaining subframe periods. The gradation level supplied in each subframe period is determined by whether the gradation level of the input image signal is higher than the threshold level (T).

By the above control, the temporal center position of the display luminance is fixed to the temporal center position of one frame period or the subframe period closest to the temporal center position. Thus, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. The problem of the technique of 2001-296841, namely, the change in the temporal center position of the display luminance according to the gray level of the input image signal, causes an abnormal luminance or color imbalance that degrades the image quality. Since the display luminance of one frame period is appropriately changed, the deterioration of the quality of a moving image due to motion blur caused by a general conventional hold-type image display apparatus can be alleviated. Even when the display is performed at the maximum gradation level, the decrease in the maximum luminance and the contrast occurring in the minimum (luminance) insertion system (each one frame period includes the minimum luminance period) can be suppressed.

When n is 2 and one of the subframe periods is referred to as the subframe period α and the other subframe period is referred to as the subframe period β, the maximum or sufficiently high gray level, or the gray level of the input image signal The gradation level increased or decreased by the level is supplied in the subframe period. The gradation level supplied in the subframe period is determined by whether the gradation level of the input image signal is higher than the threshold level.

By the control, the movement of the temporal center position of luminance can be minimized. Thus, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. The problem of the technique of 2001-296841, namely, the change of the temporal center position of the display luminance according to the gray level of the input image signal, causes abnormal luminance or color imbalance that degrades the image quality is suppressed. Since the display luminance of one frame period is appropriately changed, the deterioration of the quality of a moving image due to motion blur caused by a general conventional hold-type image display apparatus can be alleviated. Even if display is performed at the maximum gradation level, the decrease in the maximum luminance and contrast occurring in the minimum (luminance) insertion system can be suppressed.

In the case where n is 2, the frame image of the intermediate state in terms of time can be generated based on two frame images that are continuously input. In this case, the gradation level supplied in the subframe period β can be determined by whether the gradation level of the image in the intermediate state is higher than the threshold level. In such a case, an image of an intermediate state in terms of time is produced by estimation. Thus, inaccurate display caused by interpolation that may be generated in some pixel parts may not be noticeable.

When n is 2, the gradation level supplied in the subframe period β is (i) the gradation level of the input image signal and (ii) the gradation of the image signal input before one frame period or the image signal to be input after one frame. It may be determined by whether the threshold level is greater than the value obtained by averaging the levels.

The upper limit (maximum level) of the gradation level supplied in the subframe period is the highest during the subframe period at which the level of the upper limit is at or close to the temporal center position, and decreases as the subframe period moves away from the center, Or the upper limit is set equal. By such setting, even if the gray level of the input image signal is high, a subframe period with low luminance can be provided. Therefore, even if the gradation of the input image signal is high, the degradation of the quality of the moving image caused by the motion blur (as caused by the conventional hold-type image display device) can be alleviated. When n = 2, the upper limit of the gradation level supplied in one of the subframe periods may be set equal to or higher than the upper limit of the gradation level supplied in the other subframe period.

The gradation level and the threshold level supplied in the subframe period may be set such that the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated luminance exhibits the gamma luminance characteristic. Thus, while ensuring the compatibility of the image signal generated in consideration of the gamma luminance characteristic of the CRTs and the gradation reproduction capability, the deterioration of the quality of a moving image caused by motion blur (such as that caused by a conventional hold-type image display device) is mitigated. Can be.

A temperature detector for detecting the temperature of the panel or the ambient temperature thereof can be provided so that the gradation level or threshold level supplied in the subframe period can be changed according to the detected temperature. Therefore, even if a display element such as a liquid crystal display element in which the response speed to the brightness increases and the response speed to the brightness increases may vary under a predetermined temperature, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the display brightness is used.

When the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in the subframe period relative to the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is a sub of a color different from the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. It is equal to the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in the frame period.

By this, even if the luminance balance differs considerably between different colors, the phenomenon in which abnormal colors appear by breaking the luminance balance of the three colors in the display of the moving image can be prevented.

In the following, various methods of assigning the luminance level assumed for the input image signal to the plurality of subframe periods will be described in response to the claims. As described in more detail below, the gradation level is adjusted to realize the luminance level assumed for the input image signal.

In the following description, for clarity, the gradation level of the input image signal is assigned such that the gradation level is gradually increased to a predetermined level. According to the present invention, assignment is immediately and practically performed on the basis of the assignment method according to the gradation level of the input image signal, for example, by an operation or conversion using a lookup table or the like.

As shown in Fig. 67A, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is sequentially assigned to a temporal center position of one frame period for image display or from a subframe period closest to the temporal center position. Next, allocation to the subframe period for the left side or the right side of the subframe period in which the luminance level has been provided is performed. Assignment is made to one subframe period at a time until each subframe period is filled. The remaining luminance level is allocated to the remaining subframe periods so that the assigned luminance level is equal to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal. Thus, the assignment is completed.

As shown in Fig. 67B, from one subframe period at the temporal center position of one frame period for image display, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is sequentially assigned. Next, allocation is made to two subframe periods for the left side or the right side of the subframe period for which the luminance level has been provided. Assignment is made simultaneously in two subframe periods at a time until each subframe period is filled. The reference of the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level allocated to the next subframe period after the predetermined subframe period is filled is a threshold level. The remaining luminance level is allocated to the next two subframe periods so that the assigned luminance level is equal to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal. Thus, the assignment is completed.

As shown in Fig. 67C, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are sequentially allocated from two subframe periods at the temporal center position of one frame period for image display. Next, allocation is made to two subframe periods for the left side or the right side of the subframe period in which the luminance level has been provided. Assignment is made simultaneously to two subframe periods at a time until each subframe period is filled. The reference of the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level allocated to the next subframe period after the predetermined subframe period is filled is a threshold level. The remaining luminance level is allocated to the remaining subframe periods so that the assigned luminance level is equal to the total luminance level assumed for the input image signal. Thus, the assignment is complete.

As shown in Fig. 67D, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signals are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the subframe period is filled with the luminance level (as indicated by the shade; threshold level T), the luminance level is assigned to another subframe period (as indicated by the point).

As shown in Fig. 68E, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signals are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 in the subframe period, the luminance is not only not only in the first subframe period but also in another subframe period (as indicated by a dot). Levels are also assigned. When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level reaches the threshold level T2 in the first sub frame period, the remaining luminance level is assigned to the second sub frame period (as indicated by dots), and the assignment is completed.

As shown in Fig. 68F, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 in the subframe period, the luminance level assigned to the subframe period is temporarily fixed (i.e., the allocation is stopped), The luminance level assumed for the input image signal is assigned to another subframe period (as indicated by the point). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T2 in the second sub frame period, the luminance level assigned to the first sub frame period is out of a fixed state, and the remaining luminance level Is assigned to the first subframe period (as indicated by the point).

As shown in Fig. 68G, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level of the input image signal reaches the threshold level T, the luminance level is the highest in one subframe period. The luminance level is allocated to another subframe period in consideration of the image state of the next one frame. More specifically, it is checked whether there is a difference (i.e., movement) between the image currently input and the image to be input next. When there is a difference, the luminance level of the second sub frame period is applied to the input picture signal in an intermediate state in terms of time between the currently input picture and the next picture to be input (that is, the picture between the two pictures is estimated). The remaining luminance level is allocated to the second sub frame period so as to be the luminance level assumed for the second sub frame period. Then, the first sub frame period is filled with the luminance level assumed for the input image signal.

As shown in Fig. 68H, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signals are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level corresponding to the assigned luminance level reaches the threshold level T, the luminance level is highest in one subframe period. An average value of the image currently input and the image to be input next is calculated, and the remaining luminance level assumed for the input image signal of the average value is allocated to another subframe period. Then, the first sub frame period is filled with the luminance level assumed for the input image signal.

As shown in Figs. 69I and 69J, the subframe periods have the same length or different lengths. The shorter the length of the subframe period, the higher the impulse effect is obtained. If the subframe period is longer, the center position of the luminance tends to approach the longer subframe period and does not move easily.

As shown in Fig. 69K, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the points). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 in the subframe period, the luminance level is also assigned to another subframe period (as indicated by the point). The luminance level is allocated such that the difference between the gradation level or the luminance level assigned to the two subframe periods is constant.

As shown in Fig. 69L, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 in the subframe period, the luminance level is also assigned to another subframe period (as indicated by a dot). The luminance level is assigned so that the difference between the gradation level or the luminance level assigned to the two subframe periods depends on a predetermined function (e.g., a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined coefficient by a constant).

As shown in Fig. 70M, when the response time of the liquid crystal material with respect to the increase in luminance > the response time of the liquid crystal material with respect to the decrease in luminance, the allocation of the luminance level starts from the second sub frame period. When the response time of the liquid crystal material to the increase in luminance < the response time of the liquid crystal material to the decrease in luminance, the allocation of the luminance level starts in the first subframe period.

As shown in Fig. 70N, the luminance level when the response time of the display element (the luminance is increased) to the brightness switching from Lmin to Lmax> the response time of the display element to the luminance switching from Lmax to Lmin (the luminance is reduced). Is assigned in the second subframe period. When the response time of the display element for changing the luminance from Lmin to Lmax (the luminance is increased) <the response time of the display element for reducing the luminance from Lmax to Lmin (the luminance is decreased), the allocation of the luminance level is performed in the first subframe period. Starts from.

As shown in Fig. 70O, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signals are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level assumed for the input image signal reaches the upper limit L in the subframe period (as shown by the shade; the threshold level T), the luminance level is changed in another subframe period ( As indicated by dots).

As shown in Fig. 70P, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is allocated from the subframe period (as indicated by the dot) at the temporal center position of one frame period. When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level in the center subframe period reaches the highest upper limit L1 (as indicated by the shade; threshold level T1), the luminance level is represented by the center subframe period (indicated by the point). Are allocated simultaneously in the subframe periods for the right and left sides of the &quot; When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level in these subframe periods reaches the second highest upper limit L2 (as indicated by the shade; threshold level T2), the gradation corresponding to the luminance level in these subframe periods The luminance levels are assigned to the subframe periods for the left and right of these subframe periods (as indicated by dots) until the level reaches the lowest upper limit value L3.

As shown in Fig. 71Q, the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are sequentially assigned from one of the two subframe periods (as indicated by the dots). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level reaches a higher upper limit L1 (as indicated by the shade; threshold level T) in the subframe period, the luminance level is lower than the upper limit L2 (at the point). Brightness levels are assigned to different subframe periods.

As shown in Fig. 71R, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is allocated from one of the two subframe periods at the temporal center position (as indicated by the point) of one frame period. The luminance level of the subframe period is set so that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. When the subframe period is filled (as indicated by the shade), the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is different among the two subframe periods at the temporal center position of one frame period (as indicated by the points). Is assigned to the period. The luminance level of the subframe period is set such that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. When the subframe period is filled (as indicated by the shade), the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is assigned to a subframe period adjacent to the subframe period (as indicated by the point). The luminance level in the subframe period is set such that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. When the subframe period is filled (as indicated by the shade), the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is assigned to a subframe period adjacent to the first center subframe period (as indicated by the point). The luminance level in the subframe period is set such that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. Such operation is repeated. Therefore, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is first assigned to the temporal center position or the subframe period closest to the temporal center position, and then to the subframe periods for the left and right of the center subframe period.

As shown in Fig. 71S, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is allocated from one of the subframe periods at the temporal center of one frame period (as indicated by the point). The luminance level of the subframe period is set so that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. When the subframe period is filled (as indicated by the shade; threshold level T1), the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is the sub for the left and right sides of the center subframe period (as indicated by the point). Allocated simultaneously in the frame period. The luminance level of the subframe period is set such that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. When these subframe periods are filled (as indicated by the shade; threshold level T2), the luminance levels assumed for the input image signal are applied to the left and right sides of these subframe periods (as indicated by the points). Allocated simultaneously in the subframe period. The luminance level of the subframe period is set such that the time-integrated luminance reproduces an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. Such operation is repeated. Therefore, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is first assigned to the subframe period at the temporal center position, and then to the subframe periods for the left and right sides of the center subframe period.

According to the present invention, in an image display apparatus which performs image display in one frame period by the sum of time-integrated values of luminance displayed in a plurality of subframe periods, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is controlled. . By this, when the moving image is displayed, the distance that the temporal center of luminance moves in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal can be minimized. This is an inaccurate luminance and color observed because (i) the decrease in maximum luminance or contrast is suppressed, and (ii) the temporal center of luminance depending on the gradation level of the input image signal shifts considerably when displaying moving images. The quality deterioration due to the balance is suppressed, and (iii) the degradation of the quality deterioration of the moving image due to the motion blur which is a problem of the conventional hold-type image display device is provided.

According to the present invention, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period and the threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level are the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated luminance in one frame period. Is set to exhibit an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. Therefore, while ensuring compatibility in terms of gradation reproducibility with conventional image signals generated in consideration of the gamma luminance characteristics of CRTs, the quality degradation of moving images due to motion blur can be alleviated.

According to the present invention, the threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level and the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period is set in accordance with the display panel or the temperature around it. Therefore, even when a display element such as a liquid crystal display element is used in which the response speed for increasing the luminance and the response speed for decreasing the luminance may be different under a predetermined temperature, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the display luminance Can be maintained.

Accordingly, the present invention described herein is compatible in terms of gradation representation to an image signal generated to be output to an image display device having a general luminance characteristic (e.g., a gamma luminance characteristic), while at the maximum luminance and contrast Hold image display which suppresses the deterioration, minimizes the deterioration of the quality caused by the temporal center position of the display luminance that depends on the gradation level of the input image signal, and minimizes the deterioration of the quality of the moving image caused by the post image and the motion blur. Device; An electronic device using the image display device for a display portion, a liquid crystal television, a liquid crystal monitoring device; An image display method for performing image display using the image display apparatus; A display control program for causing a computer to execute the image display method; And a computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon a display control program.

These and other advantages of the present invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art upon reading and understanding the following detailed description with reference to the accompanying drawings.

In the following, the invention is described by way of exemplary embodiments 1-12 with reference to the accompanying drawings.

As used herein, the term "gradation level" refers to the level of the input signal. The term "luminance level" refers to the brightness level of the displayed image.

Fig. 1 is a block diagram showing the basic structure of the image display device 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 1, the image display apparatus 1 detects the display panel 10 (the image display portion, that is, the image display portion), the temperature of the display panel 10, or the temperature of the peripheral portion of the display panel 10. As shown in FIG. A temperature sensor IC 20 (temperature detector), a frame memory 30 (frame data memory) for storing an image of one frame, and a controller LSI 40 for controlling various parts of the image display 1 (display controller ).

The display panel 10 includes a display element array 11, a TFT substrate 12, source drivers 13a to 13d, and gate drivers 14a to 14d.

The display element array 11 includes a plurality of display elements 11a (pixel portions) in a matrix. The plurality of display elements 11a are formed of liquid crystal material or organic EL material.

In the display area of the TFT substrate 12, a plurality of pixel electrodes 12a for driving the display element 11a and the plurality of TFTs 12b, respectively, are provided. The plurality of TFTs 12b are for switching ON or OFF the supply of display voltages to the pixel electrodes 12a, respectively. The plurality of pixel electrodes 12a and the plurality of TFTs 12b are arranged in a matrix corresponding to the display element 11a. In the regions along the display element array 11 and the TFT substrate 12, the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d and the first to fourth gate drivers 14a to 14d are provided. The first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d are for driving the pixel electrode 12a and the display element 11a through the respective TFTs 12b. The first to fourth gate drivers 14a to 14d are for driving the TFT 12b.

In the display region of the TFT substrate 12, a plurality of source voltage lines and gate voltages (scan signal voltages) connected to the source drivers 13a to 13d to provide a source voltage (display voltage) are provided. A plurality of gate voltage lines connected to ˜14d) are provided. The plurality of source voltage lines and the plurality of gate voltage lines are arranged to vertically intersect with each other, for example. At each intersection of the source voltage line and the gate voltage line, the pixel electrode 12a and the TFT 12b are provided. The gate electrode of each TFT 12b is connected to each gate voltage line (ie, gate voltage line through each intersection point). The source electrode of each TFT 12b is connected to each source voltage line (i.e., source voltage line through each intersection point). The drain electrode of each TFT 12b is connected to each pixel electrode 12a.

The leftmost source voltage line connected to each source driver (source drivers 13a to 13d) will be referred to as a first source voltage line, and a source voltage line adjacent to the first source voltage line will be referred to as a second source voltage line. will be. The source voltage line will be referred to this way and the rightmost source voltage line connected to each source driver will be referred to as the final source voltage line. The highest gate voltage line connected to each gate driver (gate drivers 14a to 14d) will be referred to as a first gate voltage line, and a gate voltage line adjacent to the first gate voltage will be referred to as a second gate voltage line. The gate voltage line will be referred to in this manner and the lowest gate voltage line connected to each gate driver will be referred to as the final gate voltage line.

For simplicity, Fig. 1 shows a first source voltage line connected to the first source driver 13a, a first gate voltage line connected to the first gate driver 14a, a TFT 12b connected thereto, and the TFT 12b. Only the connected pixel electrode 12a and the display element 11a corresponding to the pixel electrode 12a are illustrated.

In the vicinity of the display panel 10, a temperature sensor IC 20 is provided for detecting the temperature of the display panel 10 or its surroundings and outputting a temperature as a temperature level signal. The frame memory 30 for holding the input image signal is also provided in the periphery of the display panel 10. The controller LSI 40 outputs a signal to the source drivers 13a to 13d and the gate drivers 14a to 14d, accesses the frame memory 30 and stores data therein, and outputs it from the temperature sensor IC 20. The temperature level signal is provided to the periphery of the display panel 10 to read the temperature level signal and to correct and control the luminance according to the temperature.

A basic display method using the image display device 1 having the above structure will be described.

The controller LSI 40 sequentially transmits the image signal corresponding to the pixel portion of one horizontal line to the first source driver 13a in synchronization with the clock signal. Since the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d are connected as shown in Fig. 1, the image signal corresponding to the pixel portion of one horizontal line is connected to the clock signal pulse corresponding to the pixel portion of one horizontal line. As a result, they are temporarily held in the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d. When the controller LSI 40 outputs the latch pulse signal to the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d in this state, each of the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d is an image signal of a corresponding pixel portion. The display voltage level corresponding to the output voltage is output to the source voltage line corresponding to the pixel portion of one horizontal line.

The controller LSI 40 also outputs an enable signal, a start pulse signal, and a vertical shift clock signal to the first to fourth gate drivers 14a to 14d as control signals. While the enable signal is at the LOW level, the gate voltage line is in the OFF state. If the start pulse signal is input to the rising edge of the vertical shift clock signal while the enable signal is at the HIGH level, the first gate voltage line of the corresponding gate driver is placed in the ON state. If the start pulse signal is not input to the rising edge of the vertical clock shift signal, the next gate voltage line is placed in the ON state to the gate voltage line that was immediately turned ON.

A TFT connected to the gate voltage line (corresponding to the pixel portion of one horizontal line) by one gate voltage line that is placed in an ON state while the display voltage corresponding to the pixel portion of one horizontal line is output to the source voltage line. 12b is placed in the ON state. As a result, the pixel electrodes 12a corresponding to the pixels of one horizontal line are supplied with charges (display voltages) from respective source voltage lines. Therefore, the state of the corresponding display element 11a changes, and image display is performed. Such display control is repeated for each horizontal line, so that image display is performed on the entire display screen.

In the following, the image display apparatus 1 and the image display method according to the present invention are explained by the specific embodiments 1 through 8. In Embodiments 1 through 8, the above-described image display device 1 including the controller LSI 40 is used.

(Example 1)

In Embodiment 1 of the present invention, image display is performed for each pixel portion on the screen by the sum of time-integrated values (or levels) of luminance during the first and second sub frame periods. During one of two uniquely defined subframe periods (for example, the first subframe period), the image signal of the maximum gradation level, or the image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. Is supplied. This subframe period is called " subframe period alpha ". During another subframe period (e.g., the second subframe period), an image signal of a minimum gray level or an image signal of a gray level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gray level of the input image signal is supplied. This subframe period is called " subframe period beta ". The control is performed in a single pixel unit or a predetermined number of pixel units.

Which one of the sub frame period alpha and the sub frame period beta is determined is assigned to the first sub frame period, and the second sub frame period is described later.

In Embodiment 1, the display panel 10 uses a liquid crystal material having a high temperature dependency of response speed as the display element.

Fig. 2 is a block diagram of the structure of the controller LSI 40 (as the display control unit; shown in Fig. 1) of the first embodiment. In Embodiment 1, controller LSI 40 is represented by reference numeral 40A.

As shown in Fig. 2, the controller LSI 40A includes a line buffer 41 (line data memory section), a timing controller 42 (timing control section), and frame memory data selection means 43 (frame memory data selector). ), A first gradation conversion circuit 44 (first gradation conversion section), a second gradation conversion circuit 45 (second gradation conversion section), and an output data selection means 46 (output data selection section). do.

The line buffer 41 receives the input image signal in units of horizontal lines, and temporarily stores the input image signal. The line buffer 41 includes a receiving port and a transmitting port independently, and thus can transmit and receive signals simultaneously.

The timing controller 42 controls the frame memory data selecting means 43 to selectively select data transfer to the frame memory 30 or read data from the frame memory 30. The timing controller 42 also controls the output data selecting means 46 to selectively select the data output from the first gradation conversion circuit 44 or the data output from the second gradation conversion circuit 45. That is, the timing controller 42 selects the first sub frame period or the second sub frame period for the output data selecting means 46, as described in detail later.

The frame memory data selecting means 43 is controlled by the timing controller 42 to selectively select data transfer or data read. At the time of data transfer, the frame memory data selecting means 43 transfers the input image signal stored in the line buffer 41 to the frame memory 30 in units of horizontal lines. In reading data, the frame memory data selecting means 43 reads out an input image signal read before one frame period and stored in the frame memory 30 in units of horizontal lines, and converts the read data into the second tone conversion circuit 45. To transmit.

The first gradation conversion circuit 44 converts the gradation level of the input image signal supplied from the line buffer 41 into a gradation level or a maximum gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal.

The second gradation conversion circuit 45 converts the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame data selecting means 43 into a gradation level or a minimum gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal.

The first gradation conversion circuit 44 and the second gradation conversion circuit 45 have a function of changing the conversion value in accordance with the temperature level signal output from the temperature sensor IC 20. In Embodiment 1, the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and the second gradation conversion circuit 45 include a lookup table that stores an output value corresponding to the input value. Optionally, the output value can be calculated by the computing circuit.

The output data selecting means 46 selects the image signal output from the first gradation conversion circuit 44 or the image signal output from the second gradation conversion circuit 45 selectively in units of horizontal lines. Controlled by The output data selecting means 46 outputs the selected image signal as a panel image signal.

The operation of the image display device of Embodiment 1 including the controller LSI 40A having the above-described structure will be described.

3 is a timing diagram of signals of the image display device of Embodiment 1 shown by the horizontal period. In Fig. 3, an image signal is input for the first horizontal line to the third horizontal line of the Nth frame.

In Fig. 3, the characters in parentheses ([]) indicate frames and horizontal lines on which image signals to be transmitted are input. For example, [f, 1] indicates that an image signal input to the first horizontal line of the f'th frame is transmitted. [N, 2] indicates that an image signal input to the second horizontal line of the Nth frame is transmitted. The Mth line is an intermediate horizontal line on the screen. In Embodiment 1, the Mth line is a horizontal line driven by the first gate voltage line of the third gate driver 14c. &Quot; C1 " indicates that the first gradation conversion circuit 44 transmits the image signal obtained by converting the input image signal input to the frame and horizontal line shown in the next parenthesis ([]). &Quot; C2 &quot; indicates that the image signal obtained by converting the input image signal input to the frame and horizontal line immediately shown by the next gray scale conversion circuit 45 by the second gray scale conversion circuit 45 is transmitted.

In operation, the input image signal is first received by the line buffer 41 as indicated by arrow D1 in FIG.

Then, as indicated by arrow D2, while one horizontal line of the image signal is received, the image signal is written from the line buffer 41 to the frame memory 30 through the frame memory data selection means 43 and And from the line buffer 41 to the first gradation conversion circuit 44. The first gradation conversion circuit 44 outputs the converted image signal as a panel image signal.

As indicated by the arrow D3, an image signal is optionally written to the frame memory 30 so that the image signal of the horizontal line which is half the frame period before the horizontal line of the image signal to be written is frame memory 30 in units of horizontal lines. ) Is read. The read image signal is converted by the second tone conversion circuit 44 via the frame memory data selection means 43 and output as a panel image signal.

One horizontal line of the panel image signal is output from the controller LSI 40A and transmitted to the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d by a clock signal. Then, when the latch pulse signal is provided, the display voltage corresponding to the display luminance of each pixel portion is output from each source voltage line. At this point, the gate driver corresponding to the horizontal line supplied with the charge (display voltage) on the source voltage line for performing the image display is supplied with the vertical shift clock signal or the gate start pulse signal as necessary. Thus, the scan signal on the corresponding gate voltage line is placed in the ON state. For a gate driver not used for image display, the enable signal is set at the LOW level, and thus the scan signal of the corresponding gate voltage line is set to the OFF state.

In the example shown in Fig. 3, as indicated by arrow D4, the M-th line (one horizontal line) of the image signal of the (N-1) th frame is transmitted to the source driver. Then, as indicated by arrow D5, the enable signal is placed at the HIGH level from the controller LSI 40A to the third gate driver 14c. As indicated by arrows D6 and D7, the start pulse signal and the vertical shift clock signal are supplied to the third gate driver 14c. As a result, as indicated by arrow D8, the TFT 12b connected to the first gate voltage line (corresponding to the Mth line on the screen in terms of the display position) of the third gate driver 14c is in an ON state. Is placed. Thus, an image display is performed. At this point, the enable signals for the first, second, and fourth gate drivers 14a, 14b, and 14d that are not in the display position are placed at the LOW level, and the first, second, and fourth gate drivers 14a. TFT 12b connected to, 14b and 14d is in an OFF state.

Next, as indicated by arrow D9, the first line (one horizontal line) of the image signal of the N-th frame is transmitted to the source driver. Thereafter, as indicated by arrow D10, the enable signal from controller LSI 40A to first gate driver 14a is placed at the HIGH level. As indicated by arrows D10 and D11, the start pulse signal and the vertical shift clock signal are supplied to the first gate driver 14a. As a result, as indicated by arrow D13, the first gate voltage line (corresponding to the first line on the screen in terms of the display position) of the first gate driver 14a is placed in the ON state. Thus, image display is performed. At this point, the second to fourth gate drivers 14b, 14c, and 14d not in the display position are placed at the LOW level, and the TFT 12b connected to the second to fourth gate drivers 14b, 14c, and 14c. Is in the OFF state.

FIG. 4 shows how the image signal on the screen is rewritten by repeating the display control shown in FIG. Specifically, Fig. 4 shows a method in which the image signal is rewritten in the period in which the image signals of the Nth frame and the (N + 1) th frame are input.

In Fig. 4, the inclined arrow indicates the vertical position and timing at which one horizontal line of the image signal is rewritten. Ci [f] is represented by the image signal obtained by the conversion in which the image signal of the f'th frame is performed by the i-th gray conversion circuit (the first gray conversion circuit 44 or the second gray conversion circuit 45). Indicates. The image display information is retained until the image signal of the same line is rewritten. In FIG. 4, the white area indicates the position where the image display information obtained by the conversion performed by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is held, and the shaded area is obtained by the conversion performed by the second gradation conversion circuit 45. In FIG. The position at which image display information is held is shown. The dotted line indicates the boundary between the first to fourth gate drivers 14a to 14d that are driven.

Note that, when paying attention to the vertical position of one horizontal line on the screen, the following can be seen: During the half frame, image display is performed with the image signal obtained by the conversion by the first gradation conversion circuit 44; During the next 1/2 frame, image display is performed with an image signal obtained by the conversion by the second tone conversion circuit 45. The first half frame of the frame is called a first sub frame period, and the second half frame of the frame is called a second sub frame period.

Whether the subframe period α is allocated to the first subframe period or the second subframe period and whether the subframe period β is assigned to the first subframe period or the second subframe period are used. It is determined by the response speed characteristic for switching the brightness of the panel.

In the case of the display panel used in Embodiment 1, the response speed for the brightness switching from the minimum brightness level to the maximum brightness level is low (that is, the response time for the brightness switching is long), and the response is one subframe. It is not completed in the period. In contrast, the response speed for the brightness switching from the maximum luminance level to the minimum luminance level is high, and the luminance response is substantially completed in one subframe period.

In the above display panel, when the gradation level of the input image signal is changed as shown in Fig. 5, the subframe period alpha is assigned to the first subframe period, and the subframe period beta is second. It is allocated to the subframe period. Fig. 6 shows the luminance change in such a case.

In Fig. 6, as indicated by arrow D37-1, the gradation level changes most significantly in the first sub frame period when the level of the input image signal rises considerably. As described above, in the display panel used in Embodiment 1, the response speed for the brightness switching from the minimum luminance level to the maximum luminance level is low, and thus the luminance response is not completed in one subframe period. Therefore, the luminance response is not sufficiently completed at the end of the first sub frame period indicated by arrow D37-2. As a result, the state of the luminance change is different from the next frame that has the same gradation level of the input image signal. This causes the following disadvantages in the actual picture: pseudo contours are generated at the edges of the moving object; Or in the case of color display, the color balance between different color components is broken and abnormal colors appear.

Next, when the gradation level of the input image signal is changed as shown in Fig. 5, the subframe period alpha is allocated to the second sub frame period, and the sub frame period beta is the first sub frame period. Is assigned to. Fig. 7 shows the display luminance change in such a case.

In Fig. 7, as shown by arrow D38-1, when the level of the input image signal falls considerably, the gradation level changes most greatly in the first sub frame period. As described above, in the display panel used in the first embodiment, the response speed to the brightness switching from the maximum luminance level to the minimum luminance level is high, so that the luminance response is substantially completed in one subframe period. Thus, the luminance response is sufficiently completed at the end of the first sub frame period indicated by arrow D38-2. As a result, the state of the luminance change is the same as in the next frame where the gradation level of the input image signal is the same. Therefore, the disadvantage of generating a pseudo contour at the edge of the moving object does not occur, or in the case of color display, the color balance between different colors is not broken and no abnormal color appears. For this reason, in Embodiment 1, the subframe period alpha is allocated to the second sub frame period, and the sub frame period beta is assigned to the first sub frame period.

An image display method performed using the image display device of the first embodiment will be described.

In Embodiment 1, the second sub frame period is referred to as the sub frame period alpha as described above. In the subframe period α, an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied when the gradation level of the input image signal is below a uniquely determined threshold level, and the gradation of the input image signal When the level is larger than the threshold level, the input image signal is converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 so that the image signal of the maximum gradation level is supplied.

The first sub frame period is referred to as the sub frame period beta as described above. In the subframe period β, when the gradation level of the input image signal is below the arbitrarily determined threshold level, so that the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied, and when the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the input image The input image signal is converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45 so that the image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the signal is supplied.

Here, the luminance level which is a target value for the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period is described.

8 shows a target luminance level of Embodiment 1. FIG.

In Fig. 8, the left part shows the luminance level assumed for the input image signal. The middle portion shows the display luminance in each of the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period. The right part shows the time-integrated luminance of two subframe periods of one frame period. This value is considered to match the brightness actually perceived by the observer's eye. Here, the maximum capability value that can be obtained by time integration of the luminance of the display panel 10 is set to 100%. Fig. 8 shows luminance levels assumed for input image signals in consideration of gamma luminance characteristics of 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%.

As shown in Fig. 8, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal of 1/2 (50%) of the maximum luminance is set as a threshold level which is a reference to the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. do. When the luminance level assumed for the input image signal is 1/2 or less (50%) of the maximum luminance, the luminance of the second sub frame period is expressed as follows.

Luminance in the second sub frame period = assumed luminance x 2 (predetermined ratio, i.e., multiplied by 2) for the input image signal.

Therefore, the luminance of the second sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the luminance assumed for the input image signal. For example, when the luminance assumed for the input image signal is 25%, the luminance of the second sub frame period is 25% x 2 = 50%.

When the luminance assumed for the input image signal is larger than 1/2 (50%) of the maximum luminance, the luminance in the second sub frame period is the maximum luminance (100%).

When the luminance assumed for the input image signal is 1/2 or less (50%) of the maximum luminance, the luminance in the first sub frame period is the minimum luminance (0%).

When the luminance assumed for the input image signal is larger than 1/2 (50%) of the maximum luminance, the luminance of the first sub frame period is expressed as follows.

Luminance in the first sub frame period = assumed luminance x 2-1 with respect to the input image signal (a predetermined ratio, that is, multiplication value: 2).

Therefore, the luminance of the first sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the luminance assumed for the input image signal. For example, when the luminance assumed for the input image signal is 75% (3/4), the luminance in the first sub frame period is (3/4) x 2-1 = 50%.

As described above, the gradation level of the input image signal is determined by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 (in the first subframe period) and the second gradation conversion circuit 45 (in the second subframe period) according to the set luminance level. The converted value is output in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period, respectively. In this way, the temporal center position of the display luminance is fixed in the second sub frame period without depending on the gradation level of the input image signal. Thus, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Deterioration of image quality caused by abnormal luminance or color imbalance, which is a problem of the technique of 2001-296841, can be suppressed.

For example, current general image signals such as TV broadcast signals, video reproduction signals, and PC (personal computer) image signals are mostly generated and output in consideration of gamma luminance characteristics of cathode ray tubes (CRTs). In this case, the gradation level of the image display signal and the display luminance assumed for the gradation level do not have a linear relationship. Therefore, in order to realize proper gradation representation by display elements such as liquid crystal display elements and EL display elements, a source driver is a circuit for converting an image signal into a source voltage, and a circuit having substantially the same gamma luminance characteristics as in a CRT is generally used. Include as.

In Embodiment 1, the gradation level of the input image signal and the display luminance assumed for the gradation level have the following relationship.

Display Luminance = (Gradation Level / Maximum Gradation Level of Input Image Signal) ^γ

(γ = 2.2) ... equation (1)

(Here, the maximum value of the display luminance is "1" and the minimum value of the display luminance is "0").

In Embodiment 1, the source drivers 13a to 13d of the display panel 10 are designed to have the same gamma luminance characteristic as that of Expression (1). This is because, as in a general conventional hold display device, when one frame of an input image signal is simply reproduced in one frame period, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the display luminance assumed for the gradation level is reproduced. It is made to be. In this case, the gradation level of the input image signal and the display luminance assumed for the gradation level have a relationship shown in FIG.

Even when image display of one frame is performed in two subframe periods as in the first embodiment, it is preferable that the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the display luminance assumed for the gradation level can be reproduced.

In order to realize this, in Embodiment 1, after (a) the threshold level, which is a reference to the gradation level of the image signal in each subframe period, and (b) is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal, The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the subframe period is set so that the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time integral value of the luminance in one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic.

In Embodiment 1, a priority is given to suppressing the deterioration of luminance, rather than improving the movement blur at all gradation levels. When the gradation level of the input image signal is maximum, image display is performed at the maximum capability luminance of the display panel 10.

In this case, the gradation level of the input image signal, the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period, and the gradation level supplied in the second sub frame period have the following relationship.

(Gradation level / maximum gradation level of the input image signal) ^γ = {(Gradation level / maximum gradation level supplied in the first subframe period) ^γ + (Gradation level / maximum gradation level supplied in the second subframe period) ^γ }/2

(γ = 2.2) ... equation (2)

Fig. 9 shows the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal satisfying equation (2), the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period, and the gradation level supplied in the second sub frame period.

In Fig. 9, the left part shows the gradation level of the input image signal. The middle part shows the gradation level supplied to each of the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period after being converted from the gradation level of the input image signal. The right part shows the time integral of luminance in two subframe periods in one frame period. 9 shows time integrals of luminance of 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%.

As shown in Fig. 9, the luminance level assumed for the input image signal of 1/2 (50%) of the maximum luminance, that is, the gradation level of the input image signal of 72.97% is determined by the image signal supplied in each subframe period. It is set as a threshold level, which is a reference for the gradation level. When the gradation level of the input image signal is 72.97% or less, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the luminance assumed for the input image signal to satisfy equation (2). The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period is minimum (0%).

When the gradation level of the input image signal is 72.97% or more, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period is maximum (100%). The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the luminance assumed for the input image signal in order to satisfy equation (2).

The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period is temporarily stored in the line buffer 41 and output from the line buffer 41, and to the first gradation conversion circuit 44 of the control LSI 40A. It is obtained as a result of the input image signal to be converted by. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period is temporarily stored in the frame memory 30 and output from the frame memory 30, by the second gradation conversion circuit 45 of the control LSI 40A. Obtained as a result of the converted input image signal.

When the converted gradation level as shown in the middle part of Fig. 9 is supplied, the luminance according to the gamma luminance characteristic shown by Equation (1), which the source driver of the display panel 10 has, is shown in Fig. 54. Image display is performed in the first and second sub frame periods.

As a result, the time-integrated luminance of the first and second sub frame periods of one frame period as shown in the right part of Fig. 9 is perceived as brightness to the observer's eye. This time-integrated luminance is represented by equation (1) and reproduces the gamma luminance characteristic assumed for the input image signal, as shown in FIG. Thereby, it turns out that appropriate gamma brightness characteristic is reproduced by the image display apparatus and image display method of Example 1. As shown in FIG.

In order to display an image of a moving object in the horizontal direction with the still background using the image display device and method of Embodiment 1, when the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently low, the image of the minimum gradation level is displayed on the display portion of the still background and Both display portions of the moving object are supplied in the second sub frame period. Thus, as in the case of the image display apparatus employing the minimum (luminance) insertion system shown in Figs. 50 and 51, the movement blur is alleviated to improve the quality of the moving image.

In the following description, an image of an object having a gradation level of 72.97% or more (display brightness of 50% or more), moving in the background having a much higher luminance, is a general conventional hold-type image display device and the embodiment 1 It is input to an image display device.

Fig. 56 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the above-described image is input to a general conventional hold-type image display apparatus. In FIG. 56, similar to FIG. 48, each one frame period T101 is a whole lighting period T102. The first subframe period or the second subframe period is not provided. FIG. 57 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 56 as seen by the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object. FIG.

Fig. 58 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line of the screen when the above-described image is input to the image display device of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58, each one frame period T101 includes two sub frame periods T201 (first sub frame period) and T202 (second sub frame period). Since the gradation level of the moving object and the gradation level of the still background are both greater than 72.97%, the second subframe period A2 of the moving object and the second subframe period B2 of the still background are displayed at maximum luminance. The first sub frame period A1 of the moving object and the first sub frame period B1 of the still background are displayed at different luminance levels. FIG. 59 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 58 as seen by the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object. FIG. It can be seen that the motion blur is alleviated in comparison with the case of the general conventional hold-type image display device (Fig. 57). As such, in Embodiment 1, the maximum (luminance) insertion method provides an improvement by a different operating principle than the minimum (luminance) insertion system.

Fig. 10 shows a change in luminance along one horizontal line of the screen when the still background and the object of the image display device of the first embodiment move horizontally. The object is Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. It moves horizontally with the still background as described in Example 7 of 2001-296841 (FIGS. 52 and 53).

In Fig. 10, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction) in the horizontal direction of the screen, and the vertical axis represents time. Fig. 10 shows an image displayed on the screen of three frames.

In Fig. 10, each one frame period T101 includes two subframe periods T201 (first sub frame period) and T202 (second sub frame period). For the display portion B of the still background, the gradation level of the input image signal is low. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion B is turned off at the minimum luminance of 0%. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion B is in the lit state with the luminance of 40% as the image signal of the gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. For the display portion A of the moving object, the gradation level of the input image signal is higher than the predetermined threshold level. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion A is in the lit state of 20% luminance with the image signal of the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion A is in the lit state of the maximum luminance of 100%. A number with "% " represents the luminance level of the image for a maximum display capability of 100%. For example, the number surrounded by the dotted line for B1 represents a luminance of 0%.

FIG. 11 shows the brightness distribution of the image shown in FIG. 10 as seen by the observer's eye paying attention to the moving object.

Fig. 11 shows that the shape of the line representing the luminance change is different between the left end and the right end of the moving object as indicated by the dashed circle. However, the defect shown in Fig. 53, in which portions that are brighter or darker than the original image, are alleviated.

Next, the temperature correction function of the image display device of Example 1 will be described.

The image display apparatus of Example 1 uses a liquid crystal element as the display element 11a of the display panel 10. The response speed of liquid crystal materials is generally known to be lower as the temperature is lowered and higher as the temperature is higher. Under certain temperature conditions, the response speed for increasing the transmittance with respect to the change in the gradation level may be different from the response speed for decreasing the transmittance with the change in the gradation level. The difference of the above-mentioned response speed with temperature, and which response speed (i.e., response speed at which the transmittance increases or decreases) is high depends on the use conditions of the liquid crystal material.

In the case of the liquid crystal material used in Example 1, the response rate for increasing the transmittance and the response rate for decreasing the transmittance and the response rate for decreasing the transmittance are substantially the same as when the temperature is high, and the response rate for decreasing the transmittance is The lower the temperature, the lower. With the above liquid crystal material, even if the same gradation level of the image signal is supplied to an image display device which performs image display of one frame using time-integrated luminance of two subframe periods, under predetermined temperature conditions, the luminance is different. Can be.

Fig. 12 shows a difference in luminance depending on the temperature conditions when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel 10 used in the first embodiment is not adjusted in accordance with the temperature conditions. The left part shows the response speed of the liquid crystal material at high temperature, and the right part shows the response speed of the liquid crystal material at low temperature. The thick line indicates the gradation level. At both high and low temperatures, the same gradation level of the image signal is input. The shaded area represents the luminance that changes with the response speed of the liquid crystal material.

As described above, as in the case of the liquid crystal material used in Example 1, as the temperature decreases, the response speed to the decrease in transmittance becomes slow (ie, the luminance decreases). Therefore, at the low temperature shown on the right side of FIG. 12, the luminance level does not sufficiently decrease in the first sub frame period as compared with the case at the high temperature shown on the left side of FIG. As a result, the time-integrated luminance increases. Therefore, even when the same gradation level of the input image signal is supplied at high and low temperatures, the brightness perceived by the observer's eye is different. In the image display apparatus, it is not preferable that the brightness perceived by the observer's eye varies depending on the temperature condition. In order to solve this problem, the image display device of Example 1 has a temperature correction function as follows.

The temperature level signal output from the temperature sensor IC 20 provided near the display panel 10 is input to the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and the second gradation conversion circuit 45. As described above, the first grayscale conversion circuit 44 and the second grayscale conversion circuit 45 include a lookup table. More specifically, each of the first grayscale conversion circuit 44 and the second grayscale conversion circuit 45 includes a plurality of lookup tables, and the lookup table used for the grayscale conversion includes a temperature from the temperature sensor IC 20. It is switched according to the level signal.

Fig. 13 shows the luminance difference according to the temperature condition when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel used in Example 1 is adjusted in accordance with the temperature condition. The left part shows the response speed of the liquid crystal material at high temperature, and the right part shows the response speed of the liquid crystal material at low temperature. The thick line indicates the gradation level. The shaded area represents the luminance that changes according to the response of the liquid crystal material.

Due to the temperature correction function, the lower gradation level of the image signal is input at the low temperature portion shown in the right portion of FIG. 13 as compared with the case of the high temperature shown in the left portion of FIG. As a result, the luminance change caused by the delay of the response speed of the liquid crystal material at low temperature becomes equivalent to the luminance change at high temperature. In this way, the brightness perceived by the observer's eye can be maintained at the same gradation level of the image signal, regardless of the temperature conditions.

As described above, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when an image of an object moving with a still background is displayed, the brightness detected by the observer's eye is not generated without generating an abnormally bright or dark portion than the original image. The motion blur is reduced while reducing the maximum of time-integrated luminance to only about 25%. As a result, the quality of the moving image of the hold image display apparatus can be improved. In addition, the image can be displayed with a gradation representation having luminance gamma luminance characteristics suitable for the input image signal. Even when the display panel 10 uses a liquid crystal material, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the brightness sensed by the observer's eye can be maintained regardless of the temperature condition.

(Example 2)

In Embodiment 2 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing the time-integrated values of luminance during the first and second sub frame periods of each one frame period. The image display apparatus of the second embodiment includes a display control section for performing image display control on the image display section in the two sub frame periods.

One of the two sub frame periods is referred to as the sub frame period α, and the other sub frame period is referred to as the sub frame period β. Threshold levels T1 and T2 of the gradation level in the two sub frame periods are defined. The threshold level T2 is greater than the threshold level T1.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, an image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the image display portion of the image display device in the sub frame period α, The image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the image display portion in the sub frame period β.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the image display unit in the sub frame period α. However, an image signal of a gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal and lower than the gradation level supplied in the sub frame period α is supplied to the image display portion in the sub frame period β.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T2, the gradation level of the maximum gradation level is supplied to the image display unit in the sub frame period α, and increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. Is supplied to the image display unit in the sub frame period β.

For example, the assumed luminance of the input image signal gradually changes as shown in FIG. FIG. 15 shows the luminance change with time in one horizontal line of the screen when an image having the luminance shown in FIG. 14 along with a still background moves in the horizontal direction in the image display device of Example 1. FIG. In Embodiment 1, the luminance in the first sub frame period T201 is fixed at 0% until the assumed luminance of the input image signal reaches 50%. After the assumed luminance of the input image signal exceeds 50%, the luminance in the first sub frame period increases with the assumed luminance of the input image signal. The luminance in the second sub frame period T202 is increased in accordance with the assumed luminance of the input image signal until the assumed luminance of the input image signal reaches 50%. When the assumed luminance of the input image signal exceeds 50%, the luminance in the second sub frame period is fixed at 100%.

FIG. 16 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 15 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

As shown in Fig. 16, discontinuous points (indicated by point circles) appear in the luminance change to be smoothed. Such discontinuities may be visible to the observer's eye as abnormalities such as pseudo profiles and the like.

In Example 2, in order to suppress the above problem, gradation distribution in the first and second sub frame periods is performed in a manner different from that in the first embodiment. Fig. 17 shows the target luminance level in the second embodiment.

In Embodiment 2, the threshold level T1 is defined as the gradation level when the assumed luminance is 25%, and the threshold level T2 is defined as the gradation level when the assumed luminance is 75%. When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1 (25%), the image display is performed at the minimum luminance level of 0% in the first sub frame period (sub frame period β), and the second sub frame period ( In the sub frame period a), the image display is performed at a luminance level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal.

If the assumed luminance of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 (25%) and is less than or equal to the threshold level T2 (75%), the image is at the luminance level of 0% to 50% in the first sub frame period (sub frame period β). Display is performed, and the image display is performed at a luminance level of 50% to 100% in the second sub frame period (sub frame period α). The luminance level in the sub frame period β and the luminance level in the sub frame period α are determined according to the gradation level of the input image signal, and the difference between the luminance level of the sub frame period β and the sub frame period α is maintained at 50%. In the relationship between the sub frame period β and the sub frame period α, the luminance level can be fixed, the difference between the supplied gradation levels can be fixed, or the ratio of the supplied gradation levels can be fixed. . The luminance levels of the sub frame period α and the sub frame period β, or the gradation levels supplied to the sub frame period α and the sub frame period β, can be defined by any function.

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T2 (75%), the image at a luminance level that increases or decreases depending on the gradation level of the input image signal in the first sub frame period (sub frame period β). Display is performed, and the image display is performed at the maximum luminance level of 100% in the second sub frame period (sub frame period α).

In Example 1, when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 25% or more and less than 75%, the target display luminance level for each of the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period is the first sub frame in the second sub frame period. It gradually increases with the frame period. In contrast, in Embodiment 2, the target display luminance increases in both the second sub frame period and the first sub frame period. When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is less than 25% or 75% or more, the second embodiment operates in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

As described above, Fig. 17 shows the target luminance level in the second embodiment. As compared with Figs. 17 and 8 showing the target luminance levels in Embodiment 1, for example, when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 50%, the display luminance levels in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period are shown. Can be said to be different between Example 1 and Example 2. In the first embodiment, the target display luminance is increased up to 100% in the second sub frame period, and then increases from 0% in the first sub frame period. On the other hand, in Embodiment 2, the target display luminance is increased from 0% to 50% in the first sub frame period and from 50% to 100% in the second sub frame period.

Next, when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 25% or more or less than 75%, the gradation level supplied to each sub frame period in order to maintain the target display luminance will be described.

In Embodiment 2, as in Embodiment 1, the display panel has a gamma luminance characteristic. The input image signal also has a gamma luminance characteristic assuming CRT. In maintaining the difference between the luminance level in the first sub frame period and the luminance level in the second sub frame period at 50%, between the gradation level in the first sub frame period and the gradation level in the second sub frame period. The relationship is expressed as

(Gradation level / maximum gradation level of the second sub frame period) ^γ- (gradation level / maximum gradation level of the first sub frame period) ^γ = 0.5 (γ = 2.2). Formula (3)

The relationship with respect to the gradation level of the input image signal is the same as that of Equation (2) described in the first embodiment. Based on the above equations, Fig. 18 shows the difference between the gradation level of the input image signal, the gradation levels supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period and the time-integrated luminance, i.e., the brightness perceived by the observer's eye. Indicates a relationship. In Embodiment 1, Fig. 9 is a diagram illustrating the gradation level of the input image signal, the gradation levels supplied to the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period, and time-integrated luminance, abrasion, and brightness detected by the observer's eye. Indicates a relationship. 18 and 9, when the time-integrated luminance is 50%, the difference between the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period and the gradation level supplied in the second sub frame period is greater than that in the first embodiment. The case of Example 2 is smaller.

Fig. 19 shows the change in luminance with respect to the time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object whose brightness is gradually changed moves horizontally together with a still background in the image display apparatus of Example 2; Indicates. Note that the portion B2 (assuming luminance: 40%) and the portion B3 (assuming luminance: 60%) differ from the case of Fig. 15 (Example 1), in which the luminance difference between the first sub frame period T201 and the second sub frame period T202 is 50. Rated in%

FIG. 20 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 19 as seen by an observer watching the moving object. Discontinuous points disappear in the above luminance change (indicated by a point source in FIG. 16) (indicated by a point source in FIG. 20).

As described above, in the second embodiment of the present invention, in addition to the effect provided by the first embodiment, as shown in Fig. 14, even in the case where an object with a still background is displayed and whose brightness gradually changes is moved laterally, In addition, it provides an effect that avoids the phenomenon of observer seeing discontinuities when changing luminance.

Example 3

In Embodiment 3 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during the first and second sub frame periods. In the third embodiment, the image display apparatus includes a display control section for performing image display control on the image display section in two sub frame periods of one frame period.

One of the two sub frame periods is referred to as the sub frame period α, and the other sub frame period is referred to as the sub frame period β. Threshold levels T1 and T2 of the gradation level in the two sub frame periods are defined. Threshold level T2 is higher than threshold level T1. The gradation level (value) L is uniquely determined.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, an image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the image display portion of the image display device in the sub frame period α, The image signal of the gradation level is supplied to the image display portion in the sub frame period β.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the image signal of the gradation level L is supplied to the image display unit in the sub frame period α, and the gradation increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The level image signal is supplied to the image display portion in the sub frame period β.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is higher than the threshold level T2, an image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the image display unit in the sub frame period α, and the image signal of the maximum gradation level is It is supplied to the image display unit in the sub frame period β.

In Embodiment 3, whether the luminance in the sub frame period α is higher or lower than the luminance in the sub frame period β varies depending on the gradation level of the input image signal. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, the first subframe is determined by the relationship between the response speed for switching the brightness from the minimum brightness level to the maximum brightness level and the response speed for switching the brightness from the maximum brightness level to the minimum brightness level. The sub frame period allocated to the period and the sub frame period allocated to the second sub frame period cannot be determined. Which sub frame period is allocated to the first sub frame period and which sub frame period is allocated to the second sub frame period is preferably determined according to, for example, other characteristics of the display panel or characteristics of the displayed image. In the present embodiment, the sub frame period β is assigned to the first sub frame period, and the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period.

21 shows target luminance levels in Embodiment 3. FIG.

In the third embodiment, as shown in Fig. 21, the threshold level T1 is a gradation level when the assumed luminance is 25%, and the threshold level T2 is a gradation level when the assumed luminance is 75% and a predetermined system. The action L is defined as the gradation level when the assumed luminance is 50%.

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the image display is performed at a minimum luminance level of 0% in the first sub frame period (sub frame period β), and the second sub frame period (sub frame period alpha) The image display is performed at a luminance level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal.

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is higher than the threshold level T1 (25%) and less than or equal to the threshold level T2 (75%), it corresponds to the gradation value L (50%) in the first sub frame period (sub frame period β). The image display is performed at the gradation level, and the image display is performed at a luminance level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the second sub frame period (sub frame period α).

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T2 (75%), the image display is performed at a luminance level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal, and the second sub frame period (sub frame period α) In the image display at the maximum luminance level of 100%.

Fig. 22 shows the gradation levels of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period to realize the target display luminance.

In Embodiment 3, as in Embodiment 1, the display panel has a gamma luminance characteristic represented by Equation (1), and the input image signal is also generated in consideration of the gamma luminance characteristic represented by Equation (1). .

Fig. 23 shows the change in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when the object moves in the lateral direction together with the still background in the image display apparatus of the third embodiment. The object moves laterally as shown in Example 7 of Japanese Laid-Open Publication No. 2001-296841 with a still background. Part B of the still background is displayed at the same luminance as in the case of Fig. 10 (Example 1). In the portion A of the moving object, the assumed luminance of the input image signal exceeds 50%, so that the luminance level in the second sub frame period T202 is the luminance in the first sub frame period T201. Higher than the level.

FIG. 24 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 23 as seen by an observer watching the moving object. It is sensed that the discontinuous point (shown as a point source in FIG. 16) of the luminance change disappears (as shown by a point source in FIG. 20). Fig. 24 shows that the shape of the line showing the change in luminance differs between the left end and the right end of the moving object, as indicated by the point source. However, as in Embodiment 1, the defects shown in Fig. 53, in which there are parts that are brighter or darker than the original image, are reduced.

Example 4

In the image display apparatus of Embodiment 4 of the present invention, a display panel having a response characteristic different from that of the display panel of Embodiment 1 is used. In one of the two sub frame periods, an upper limit is provided for the supplied gradation level, so that motion blur is reduced. For simplicity, the display panel is also indicated by reference numeral 10.

In the case of the display panel used in Embodiment 4 of the present invention, the response speed to the brightness switching from the maximum luminance level to the minimum luminance level is slow, and the response is not completed within one sub frame period. On the other hand, the response speed for the brightness switching from the minimum luminance level to the maximum luminance level is fast, and the response is substantially completed within one sub frame period. Thus, the sub frame period α is assigned to the first sub frame period, and the sub frame period β is assigned to the second sub frame period.

Target luminance levels for the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period in the fourth embodiment will be described.

25 shows target luminance levels in Example 4. FIG.

In Fig. 25, the left portion shows assumed luminance of the input image signal. The middle portion represents the display luminance in each of the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period. The right part shows time-integrated luminance in two sub frame periods of one frame period. The value is matched to the brightness substantially perceived by the observer's eye. Here, the maximum possible value that can be obtained by time integration of the luminance of the display panel 10 is set to 100%. Fig. 25 shows assumed luminance levels of the input image signal in consideration of gamma luminance characteristics of 0%, 25%, 50%, 66.67%, 75% and 100%.

As shown in Fig. 25, the assumed luminance of the input image signal of 2/3 (66.67%) of the maximum luminance is set as a threshold level which is a reference to the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period. When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 2/3 (66.67%) or less of the maximum luminance, the luminance in the first sub frame period is expressed as follows.

Luminance in the first sub frame period = assumed luminance of the input image signal x 1.5 (predetermined ratio, that is, multiplication value: 1.5)

Accordingly, the luminance in the first sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the assumed luminance of the input image signal. For example, when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 25%, the luminance in the first sub frame period is 25% x 1.5 = 37.5%.

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is larger than 2/3 (66.67%) of the maximum luminance, the luminance in the first sub frame period is at most (100%). The maximum value of 100% is obtained by multiplying the threshold level 66.67% (2/3) by 1.5.

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 2/3 (66.67%) or less of the maximum luminance, the luminance in the second sub frame period is minimum (0%).

When the assumed luminance of the input image signal is larger than 2/3 (66.67%) of the maximum luminance, the luminance in the second sub frame period is expressed as follows.

Luminance in the Second Sub Frame Period = (Assuming Luminance of Input Image Signal-2/3) x 1.5

(Prescribed ratio, ie multiplier: 1.5)

Accordingly, the luminance in the second sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the assumed luminance of the input image signal. For example, when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is 75% (3/4), the luminance in the second sub frame period is (3 / 4-2 / 3) x 1.5 = 12.5%.

In Embodiment 4, in order to improve the quality of a moving image, the upper limit L1 of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period and the upper limit L2 of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period are expressed by the relational expression L1. ≥ L2 is set to be satisfied. In this embodiment, the upper limit L1 for the first sub frame period is 100% and the upper limit L2 for the second sub frame period is 50%.

Since the upper limit L2 for the second sub frame period is set to 50%, the maximum value of the brightness perceived by the observer's eye is reduced by 25%. However, even when the luminance with respect to the input image signal is maximum (100%), there is a luminance difference between the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period. Thus, the movement blur is reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the display panel and the luminance have the gamma luminance characteristic shown in equation (1), and the input image signal is also generated considering the gamma luminance characteristic shown in equation (1). The gradation level of the input image signal and the assumed display luminance of the gradation level have a relational expression shown in equation (1).

In Embodiment 4, (a) a threshold level which is a reference for the gray level of the image signal in each sub frame period, and (b) is increased or decreased according to the gray level of the input image signal, and then supplied to each sub frame period. The gradation level of the image signal is set so that the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated luminance in one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic.

In Embodiment 4, the time-integrated luminance in the two sub frame periods is matched to the brightness substantially sensed by the observer's eye. In particular, in Embodiment 4, even when the gradation level of the input image signal is high to reduce motion blur, the luminance level in the second sub frame period is limited to less than half of the maximum possible value of the display panel. In the following description, the luminance level (time-integrated luminance in one frame period) which is 75% of the maximum possible value of the display panel will be described as the maximum luminance level that can be provided by the image display apparatus of the fourth embodiment.

In this case, the gradation level of the input image signal, the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period, and the gradation level supplied in the second sub frame period have the following relationship.

(Gradation Level / Maximum Gradation Level of the Input Image Signal) ^γ = (Gradation Level / Maximum Gradation Level Supply in the First Subframe Period) ^γ + (Gradation Level / Maximum Gradation Level Supply in the Second Subframe Period) ^γ / 2 × (1 / 0.75) (γ = 2.2)

Equation 4

Fig. 26 shows the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal, the gradation level supplied in the first sub frame period, and the gradation level supplied in the second sub frame period, which satisfies equation (4).

In Fig. 26, the left part shows the gradation level of the input image signal. The middle part represents the gradation level supplied to each of the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period after being converted from the gradation level of the input image signal. The right part shows time-integrated luminance in two sub frame periods of one frame period. Figure 26 shows time-integrated values of luminance of 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 83.2% and 100%.

As shown in Fig. 26, the assumed luminance of the 83.2% input image signal is set as a threshold level which is a reference to the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. When the gradation level of the input image signal is 83.2% or less, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the assumed luminance of the input image signal so as to satisfy Expression (4). The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period is minimum (0%).

When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than 83.2%, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period is maximum (100%). The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period is increased or decreased in accordance with the assumed luminance of the input image signal so as to satisfy Expression (4).

The gradation level of the video signal supplied in the first sub frame period is obtained by converting the input video signal output from the line buffer 41 temporarily stored by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 in the control LSI 40a. Obtained as a result. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the second sub frame period is the result of the input image signal output from the temporarily stored frame memory 30 being converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45 in the control LSI 40a. Obtained as

When the converted gradation levels are supplied as shown in the middle of Fig. 26, in the first and second sub frame periods, the source driver of the display panel 10 has, also shown in Equation (1) and Fig. 54. This is done at the luminance according to the gamma luminance characteristic.

As a result, as shown in the right part of Fig. 26, the time-integrated luminance in the first and second sub frame periods of one frame period is sensed as brightness to the observer's eye. The time-integrated luminance reproduces the assumed gamma luminance characteristic of the input image signal, as shown in equation (1) and FIG. Appropriate gamma luminance characteristics can be said to be reproduced by the image display apparatus and image display method of the fourth embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, using the image display apparatus and method, when the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently low to display an image of an object moving in the horizontal direction together with the still background, the minimum gradation level becomes The display unit and the display unit of the moving object are supplied in the second sub frame period. Therefore, as in the case of the image display apparatus employing the minimum (luminance) insertion system shown in Figs. 52 and 53, the movement blur is reduced, and the contrast is increased to improve the quality of the moving image.

Fig. 27 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves in the lateral direction together with a still background in the image display device of the fourth embodiment. The object moves along the horizontal axis along with the still background, as described in Example 7 of Japanese Laid-Open Publication No. 2001-296841 (FIGS. 52 and 53).

In Fig. 27, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state in the horizontal direction of the screen (position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction), and the vertical axis represents time. 27 shows images displayed in three frames on the screen.

In Fig. 27, each one frame period T101 includes two sub frame periods T201 (first sub frame period) and T202 (second sub frame period). In the display portion B of the still background, the gradation level of the input image signal is low. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion B is in the lit state at the luminance of 40% by the image signal of the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion B is turned off at the minimum luminance of 0%. In the display portion A of the moving object, the gradation level of the input image signal is higher than the predetermined threshold level. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion A is in the lit state at the maximum luminance of 100%. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion A is in the lit state at the luminance of 20% by the image signal of the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The number together with% indicates the luminance level of the image for a maximum display capability of 100%. For example, the number enclosed by the dotted lines for B1 represents a luminance of 40%.

FIG. 28 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 27 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

Fig. 28 shows that the shape of the line showing the change in luminance differs between the left end and the right end of the moving object as indicated by the point circle. However, the defect in which there are brighter or darker portions than the original image shown in Fig. 53 is reduced.

30 shows the luminance difference according to the temperature condition when the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the display panel 10 used in the fourth embodiment is adjusted in accordance with the temperature condition. The left part shows the response speed of the liquid crystal material at high temperature, and the right part shows the response speed of the liquid crystal material at low temperature. The thick line indicates the gradation level. The shaded area represents the luminance which changes according to the response speed of the liquid crystal material.

Due to the temperature correction function, a low gradation level of the image signal is supplied to the low temperature of the right side of FIG. 30, in particular, in the second sub frame period, rather than the high temperature of the left side of FIG. Accordingly, the luminance change due to the delay in the response of the liquid crystal material at low temperature is equal to the luminance change at high temperature. In this way, the brightness perceived by the observer's eye can be maintained at the same gradation level of the image signal, regardless of the temperature conditions.

As described above, according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention, when an image of an object moving with a still background is displayed, it is detected by the observer's eye without generating abnormally brighter or darker portions than the original image. Only by 25%, which is the brightness, the motion blur is reduced while reducing the maximum of the time-integrated brightness. Accordingly, the quality of the moving image of the hold image display apparatus can be improved. Further, the image may be displayed in a gradation representation having a gamma characteristic suitable for the input image signal.

Example 5

In Embodiment 5 of the present invention, the image display apparatus expresses colors by supplying image signals of gradation levels separated by three primary colors of red, green, and blue.

Fig. 31 shows an image display device of Example 5 having a structure substantially the same as that of Example 1, in which, when an object moves in the horizontal axis along with a still background, the luminance change with time of one horizontal line on the screen is shown. Indicates. The three colors red, green and blue are displayed at separate levels of luminance. For still backgrounds, the luminance level of all colors is 0%. In the moving object, the assumed luminance of the red input image signal is 75%, and the assumed luminance of each of the green input image signal and the blue input image signal is 50%.

As shown in Fig. 31, the assumed luminance of the input image signal and the luminance level in the first and second sub frame periods have the above relations with reference to Fig. 8 for each of red, green, and blue. Thus, part A of the moving object is displayed at 50% luminance for red in the first sub frame period and at 100% luminance for red, green and blue in the second sub frame period.

Notice the dashed arrows that indicate the trajectory of the viewer's gaze watching the moving object, but as shown in the still image, the proper color is visible at the center of the object, but only red at the right end of the object and red at the left end of the object. This seems to be lacking. Since the luminance balance of the three colors is broken, abnormal colors can be seen.

This is because the red input image signal has a high gradation level and is displayed in the first and second sub frame periods, while the green and blue input image signal has a low gradation level and is displayed only in the first sub frame period. This results in a different temporal center between red and the other two colors.

To avoid this phenomenon, in Example 5, the gradation levels of the image signals supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period are related to two colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. Controlled.

This is specifically done as follows. For the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal among the three colors, the image signal having the maximal gradation level, or the image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal, is the second sub frame period. Supplied to. In the first sub frame period, an image signal having a minimum gradation level or an image signal having a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal is supplied as in the first embodiment. In each of the other two colors, the ratio between the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the luminance level displayed in the second sub frame period is displayed in the first sub frame period of the color having the maximum gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation levels are set to be equal to the ratio between the luminance level and the luminance level displayed in the second sub frame period. The image signal is supplied in each sub frame period at each obtained gradation level.

In the fifth embodiment, the temporal passage of the image signal and the method of driving the display panel 10 are substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus will not be repeated. Thereafter, a method for converting the gradation levels of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal by using the first gradation level conversion circuit 44 and the second gradation level conversion circuit 45, It demonstrates as what is different from the method of Example 1. FIG.

The display panel 10 used in the fifth embodiment has the following gamma luminance characteristics as in the first embodiment.

Display Luminance = (Gradation Level / Maximum Gradation Level of Input Image Signal) ^γ (γ = 2.2)

Formula (1)

(Here, the maximum value of the display luminance is "1" and the minimum value of the display luminance is "0".)

In the pixel portion of one frame, the first sub, the color having the input image Shin favor the maximum gradation level is supplied in the frame period, the ratio between the gradation level and the maximum gray level of the image signal X _1. The ratio between the gradation level and the maximum gradation level of the image signal of the color supplied in the second sub frame period is X ₂ .

X ₁ = gradation level / maximum gradation level in the first sub frame period

X ₂ = gradation level / maximum gradation level in the second sub frame period

The display luminance in each sub frame period is as follows due to the gamma luminance characteristic.

Display luminance in the first sub frame period = X ₁ ^γ

Display luminance in the second sub frame period = X ₂ ^γ

Similarly, the ratio between the gradation level of the image signal and the maximum gradation level of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal supplied in the first sub frame period is Y ₁ . The ratio between the gradation level and the maximum gradation level of the image signal with respect to the color supplied in the second sub frame period is Y ₂ .

Y ₁ = gradation level / maximum gradation level in the first sub frame period

Y ₂ = gradation level / maximum gradation level in the second sub frame period

The display luminance in each subframe is as follows due to the gamma luminance characteristic.

Display luminance in the first sub frame period = Y ₁ ^γ

Display luminance in second sub frame period = Y ₂ ^γ

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the ratio between the luminance level displayed in the second sub frame period of the color other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal and the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period is the input image. It is equal to the ratio between the luminance level indicated in the second sub frame period of the color having the highest gradation level of the signal and the luminance level indicated in the first sub frame period.

Thus, the following relational expression is obtained.

Y ₁ ^γ : Y ₂ ^γ = X ₁ ^γ : X ₂ ^γ . Equation (5)

Here, the gradation level of the input image signal of a color other than the color having the maximum gradation level of the input image signal is Y. As described in the fourth embodiment, the appropriate gamma luminance characteristic is defined by the gradation level of the input image signal and one frame period. In order to provide the relationship between the time-integrated luminance of the following equation, it is required that the following equation is satisfied.

Y ^γ = (Y ₁ ^γ + Y ₂ ^γ ) / 2. Formula (6)

From formulas (5) and (6),

Y ₁ = Y · {2X ₁ ^γ / (X ₁ ^γ + X ₂ ^γ )} ^{1 / γ} . Formula (7)

Y ₂ = Y (2X ₂ ^γ / (X ₁ ^γ + X ₂ ^γ )} ^{1 / γ} . Formula (8)

Therefore, the output gradation level of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is expressed by using the second gradation conversion circuit 45 and the first gradation conversion circuit 44 of the controller LSI 40a. It is determined by performing the calculation according to 7) and (8).

FIG. 32 shows the change in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves in the lateral direction together with a still background in the image display device of Example 5. FIG. For still backgrounds, the luminance level of all colors is 0%. In the moving object, the assumed luminance of the red input image signal is 75%, and as shown in Fig. 31, the assumed luminance of each of the green input image signal and the blue input image signal is 50%.

As shown in FIG. 32, unlike in the case of FIG. 31, the luminance ratio between red, green, and blue is maintained at an appropriate value in each sub frame period. Therefore, the phenomenon in which abnormal colors appear in which the luminance balance of the three colors is destroyed at the end of the moving object does not occur.

Example 6

In Embodiment 6 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during two sub frame periods (that is, the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period). Based on two frames of images that are continuously input, an image in an intermediate state in time is generated through estimation. When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level that is uniquely determined, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is one of the uniquely defined sub frame periods (for example, the first sub frame period). Supplied to. When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is also supplied in one of the uniquely defined sub frame periods (for example, the first sub frame period). When the gradation level of the image signal in the intermediate state is equal to or lower than the threshold level, the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining sub frame period (e.g., the second sub frame period). When the gradation level of the image signal in the intermediate state is greater than the threshold level, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the image signal in the intermediate state is the remaining sub frame period (e.g., the second sub frame period). Is also supplied.

33 is a block diagram of the structure of the controller LSI 40 (such as the display control unit shown in FIG. 1) of the sixth embodiment. In Embodiment 6, the controller LSI 40 is indicated by the reference numeral 40b.

As shown in Fig. 33, the controller LSI 40b includes a single line buffer 41a (line data memory section), a timing controller 42 (timing control section), frame memory data selection means 43 (frame memory data selection section). ), First gradation conversion circuit 44 (first gradation conversion section), second gradation conversion circuit 45 (second gradation conversion section), output data selection means 46 (output data selection section), first A multi-line buffer 47 (first multi-line data memory section), a second multi-line buffer 48 (second multi-line data memory section), buffer data selecting means 49 (temporary memory data selection section), And an intermediate image generation circuit 50 (intermediate image generation unit).

The single line buffer 41a receives an input image signal by one horizontal line, and temporarily stores the input image signal. Since the single line buffer 41a includes a receiving port and a transmitting port independently, it can simultaneously transmit and receive signals.

The frame memory data selecting means 43 is controlled by the timing controller 42 so as to transmit the input image signal stored in the single line buffer 41a to the frame memory 30 one by one horizontal line. Accordingly, the input image signal is transmitted to the frame memory 30 within one frame period. The frame memory 30 cannot simultaneously transmit and receive data. Therefore, the timing controller 42 makes frame memory data selection means 43 (timing control) so that data is read out from the frame memory 30 while the input image signal is not transmitted to the frame memory 30. Switch to. More specifically, the input image signal read out one frame period and stored in the frame memory 30 is read out one horizontal line and transmitted to the first multi-line buffer 47. In parallel with this, in a time division manner, the input image signal read out before two frame periods and stored in the frame memory 30 is read out one horizontal line and transmitted to the second multi-line buffer 48.

The intermediate image generation circuit 50 is configured to estimate and generate an image signal in a temporal intermediate state between an image signal input before one frame period and an image signal input before two frame periods. 47) and the image signals stored in the second multi-line buffer 48 are compared.

The first multi-line buffer 47 and the second multi-line buffer 48 may store tens of horizontal lines of the image signal. The intermediate image generation circuit 50 compares the two image signals by a range of several horizontal lines of several x pixel portions in the horizontal direction to generate an image signal in an intermediate state in time. Such an image signal is generated as follows, for example. One partial region is picked up from an image signal input before two frame periods. The sum of the gradation levels in the pixel portions of the partial region is obtained. A partial region having the same shape is obtained from an image signal input before one frame period, so that (a) the sum of gradation levels of pixel portions in the partial region of the image signal input before two frame periods, and (b) one frame period. The difference of the sum of the gradation levels of the pixel portions in the partial region of the previously input image signal becomes minimum. The partial region found from the image signal input before one frame period is estimated as the transfer destination of the partial region of the image signal input before two frame periods. By moving the partial region of the input image signal before two frame periods, the image signal is obtained by half of the transmission distance. In this manner, an image signal which is in an intermediate state in time is generated. Since the sixth embodiment is not provided to specify the image signal generation method, the method will not be described in more detail. In the above method for generating an image signal that is in an intermediate state in time, it is not easy to generate an image by accurate interpolation. Therefore, inaccurate display may occur in some pixel parts due to interpolation errors.

The image signal generated by the intermediate image generation circuit 50 is sequentially transmitted to the second gradation conversion circuit 45.

The image signal input before one frame period and stored in the first multi-line buffer 47 and the image signal input before two frame periods and stored in the second multi-line buffer 48 are also transmitted to the buffer data selecting means 49. do.

The buffer data selecting means 49 is controlled by the timing controller 42 according to the display timing, before the image signal inputted before one frame period and supplied from the first multi-line buffer 47 or before the second frame period. The image signal input and supplied from the second multi-line buffer 48 is selected. The selected image signal is transmitted to the first gradation conversion circuit 44.

As in the fourth embodiment, the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is configured to increase or decrease the gradation level of the input image signal supplied from the buffer data selecting means 49 in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. Convert to the maximum gradation level.

As in the fourth embodiment, the second gradation conversion circuit 45 has a gradation level or minimum that increases or decreases the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the intermediate image generation circuit 50 in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. Convert to a gradation level.

The output data selecting means 46 is controlled by the timing controller 42 to select the image signal output from the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and output the image signal as a panel image signal in the first sub frame period, or The image signal output from the second gradation conversion circuit 45 is selected, and the image signal is output as the panel image signal in the second sub frame period.

The operation of the image display apparatus of Embodiment 6 including the controller LSI 40b having the above structure will be described.

Fig. 34 is a timing chart of signals for each horizontal period in the image display apparatus of the sixth embodiment.

In Fig. 34, each rectangular block represents a transmission period of one frame of an image signal. Characters in the rectangular block, for example, "N" and "N + 1", respectively indicate which frame of the image signal is being transmitted. Ci [f] in the rectangular block of the panel image signal is input by the i &lt; th &gt; gray level conversion circuit (the first gray level conversion circuit 44 or the second gray level conversion circuit 45) to input the input image signal for the fth frame. The signal obtained by converting is shown. Parentheses ([,]) containing commas indicate an image signal that is in an intermediate state between two frames in time. For example, in C2 [N-1, N], a signal obtained by converting an image signal in an intermediate state between the (N-1) th frame and the Nth state into the second gray scale conversion circuit 45 is transmitted. Indicates.

In the frame memory 30, the shaded area represents a period in which signals are written, and the white area represents a period in which signals are read. Since the frame memory 30 cannot read and write at the same time, data reading and data writing are performed in a time division manner.

As shown in Fig. 34, in the sixth embodiment, the period in which one frame period of an image signal is input includes two sub frame periods (first and second sub frame periods). In the first sub frame period, an image signal obtained by converting an image signal input before two frame periods by using the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is output. In the two sub frame periods, an image signal obtained by converting, by the second gray scale conversion circuit 45, an image signal which is in the intermediate state in time between the image signal input before one frame period and the image signal input before two frame periods. Is output.

In the sixth embodiment, the display panel 10 is driven by a method different from that of the first embodiment shown in Figs. The sixth embodiment adopts a general scheme of sequentially transmitting the image signals one by one horizontal line from the top line on the screen.

35 shows a method in which the image signal on the screen is rewritten to the image display apparatus 6 of the sixth embodiment. Specifically, Fig. 35 shows how the image signal is rewritten in the period in which the image signals for the Nth frame and the N + 1th frame are input.

In Fig. 35, the inclined arrow indicates the timing and vertical position at which one horizontal line of the image signal is rewritten. Ci [f] indicates that the image signal for the f'th frame is displayed by the image signal converted using the i &lt; th &gt; gradation conversion circuit (the first gradation conversion circuit 44 or the second gradation conversion circuit 45). Indicates. Parentheses ([,]) containing commas indicate an image signal that is in an intermediate state between two frames in time. The image display information is stored until the image signal for the same line is rewritten. In FIG. 35, the white area indicates the position where the image display information converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is stored, and the shaded area is the image display information converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45. In FIG. Indicates where the is stored. The dashed lines represent the boundary between the first to fourth gate drivers 14a to 14d that are driven.

Note that the vertical position of one horizontal line on the screen is as follows: An image is obtained by an image signal obtained by converting an image signal input before two frame periods using the first gradation conversion circuit 44 for 1/2 frame. An indication is made; An image obtained by converting, by the second gray scale conversion circuit 45, an image signal in a temporal intermediate state between an image signal input before one frame period and an image signal input before two frame periods during the next 1/2 frame. Image display is performed by the signal. The first half of the frame is referred to as the first sub frame period, and the second half of the frame is referred to as the second sub frame period.

Fig. 36 shows the change in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves in the lateral direction together with a still background in the image display apparatus of the sixth embodiment. The display luminance levels of the moving object and the still background are the same as those in Fig. 27 (Example 4).

In Fig. 36, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state in the horizontal direction of the screen (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction), and the vertical axis represents time. 36 shows images displayed on the screen in three frames.

In Fig. 36, each one frame period T101 includes two sub frame periods T201 (first sub frame period) and T202 (second sub frame period). In the display portion B of the still background, the gradation level of the input image signal is low. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion B is in the lit state at the luminance of 40% by the image signal of the gradation level which increases or decreases at a predetermined ratio in accordance with the gradation of the input image signal. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion B is turned off at the minimum luminance of 0%. In the display portion A of the moving object, the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently high. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion A is in the lit state at the luminance of 100%. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion A is 20% by the image signal of the gradation level which increases or decreases at a predetermined rate in accordance with the gradation level (generated by the estimation) of the image signal in the intermediate state in time. It is in the lit state at the luminance. The number together with "% " indicates the luminance level of the image for the maximum display capability of 100%. For example, the number enclosed by the dotted lines for B1 represents a luminance of 40%.

An image displayed in the second sub frame period is generated based on an image which is in a time intermediate state between previously input image signals. Thus, the moving object is displayed at a position on the line following the eye of the observer looking at the moving object.

FIG. 37 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 36 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

The display portion A of the moving object exists on a line following the eyes of the observer in the image displayed in the second sub frame period. Thus, the observer is likely to recognize the boundary between the still background and the moving object. As a result, the width of the motion blur is smaller than that of the conventional general hold image display apparatus shown in FIG. The width of the motion blur is smaller than that of the image display apparatus of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. The phenomenon in which brighter or darker portions than the original image shown in Fig. 53 do not occur.

When an image signal existing as an intermediate state is estimated and generated based on two frames of image signals, inaccurate display may occur in some pixel portions due to interpolation error. Assigning an externally input image signal in which the image signal in a timely intermediate state in which the conversion is performed at a relatively low gradation level is assigned to a second sub frame period, and in which the conversion is performed in a relatively high gradation level. By assigning to the sub frame period, the incorrect indication can be made inconspicuous.

As in the fourth embodiment, also in the sixth embodiment, the upper limit L1 of the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods and the upper limit L2 of the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the remaining subframe periods is L1? L2. Is set to satisfy. By the above setting, even when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is minimum, a luminance difference of more than a predetermined value can be provided between the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period. Thus, motion blur can be alleviated.

In Embodiment 6, an image signal supplied to each sub frame period after increasing or decreasing according to (a) the threshold level as a reference for the gray level of the image signal in each sub frame period and (b) the gray level of the input image signal. The gradation level of can be set so that the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated value of the luminance in one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. With the above setting, images can be displayed in a gradation representation having gamma luminance characteristics suitable for the input image signal.

In Embodiment 6, (a) the threshold level as a reference for the gray level of the image signal in each sub frame period, and (b) the increase or decrease (for example, by multiplying by a predetermined value) according to the gray level of the input image signal. After that, the gradation level of the image signal supplied to each sub frame period may be set according to the temperature level signal from the temperature sensor IC 20 which senses the temperature of the display panel 10 or the temperature in the vicinity thereof. With this setting, even when a liquid crystal material is used for the display panel 10, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the brightness sensed by the observer's eye can be maintained regardless of the temperature condition.

In the sixth embodiment, when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period can be set as follows. In each of two colors (e.g., green and blue) other than the color (e.g., red) having the highest gradation level of the input image signal, the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period are displayed. The gradation level is set so that the ratio between the luminance levels is equal to the ratio between the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the luminance level displayed in the second sub frame period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. . With this setting, the luminance ratio between the colors is kept at an appropriate value, and the degradation of the image quality due to an incorrect color balance can be prevented.

Example 7

In Embodiment 7 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during two sub frame periods (that is, the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period).

When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level that is uniquely determined, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is one of the sub frame periods uniquely determined (for example, the first sub frame period). Supplied to.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is also supplied to one of the uniquely defined sub frame periods (for example, the first sub frame period).

When the average value of the gradation level of the image signal in the current frame period and the gradation level of the input image signal before or after one frame is less than or equal to the threshold level, the image signal of the minimum gradation level is the remaining sub frame period (e.g., 2 sub frame periods).

When the average value is larger than the threshold level, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the average value is also supplied to the remaining sub frame period (e.g., the second sub frame period).

FIG. 38 is a block diagram of the structure of the controller LSI 40 (like the display control unit shown in FIG. 1) in Embodiment 7. FIG. In Embodiment 7, the controller LSI 40 is denoted by 40c.

As shown in Fig. 38, the controller LSI 40c includes a gradation level averaging circuit 51 (gradation level averaging section) instead of the intermediate image generating circuit 50 of Fig. 33 (Example 6). To calculate the average value of the gray level of the two image signals, the gray level average circuit 51 adds the gray level of the two image signals stored in the first multi-line buffer 47 and the second multi-line buffer 48, respectively. The sum is divided by two. The obtained average value is supplied to the second gradation conversion circuit 45.

The controller LSI 40c operates in substantially the same manner as the controller LSI 40b of the sixth embodiment.

As in the sixth embodiment, the flow per frame of the signals in the seventh embodiment is as shown in FIG. However, in the seventh embodiment, parentheses ([,]) including commas indicate an image signal obtained by an average value of two frames of the image signal.

In this manner, in the first sub frame period, an image signal obtained by converting the image signal input already input by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is outputted; In the second sub frame period, the second gray scale conversion circuit 45 outputs an image signal obtained by converting an average value of two frames of image signals continuously input.

FIG. 39 shows the luminance change with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves in the lateral direction together with a still background in the image display apparatus of Example 7. FIG. The display luminance levels of the moving object and the still background are the same as in the case of Fig. 27 (Example 4).

In Fig. 39, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state in the horizontal direction of the screen (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction), and the vertical axis represents time. 39 shows images displayed on the screen in three frames.

In FIG. 39, each one frame period T101 includes two sub frame periods T201 (first sub frame period) and T202 (second sub frame period). In the display portion B of the still background, the gradation level of the input image signal is low. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion B is in the lit state at the luminance of 40% by the image signal of the gradation level which increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation of the input image signal. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion B is turned off at the maximum luminance of 0%. In the display portion A of the moving object, the average value of the gradation level of the input image signal and the gradation level of the two frames of the continuously input image signals is sufficiently high. Therefore, in the first sub frame period T201, the display portion A is in the lit state at the luminance of 100%. In the second sub frame period T202, the display portion A is at 10%, 20% and 10% by an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases according to an average value of the gradation levels of two frames of image signals that are continuously input. It is on. The period in which the luminance is 10% is a period in which the gray level as an average value of the gray level of the moving object and the gray level of the still background is converted by the second gray level conversion circuit 45. The number together with "% " indicates the luminance level of the image for a maximum display capability of 100%. For example, the number enclosed by a dotted line for C represents a luminance of 40%.

According to the above setting, when the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently low, the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the second sub frame period for both the display portion A of the moving object and the display portion B of the still background. Therefore, the quality of the moving image can be improved (as in the image display apparatus employing the minimum (luminance) insertion system shown in Figs. 50 and 51).

FIG. 40 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 39 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

As indicated by the point source, the phenomenon (the embodiment 4 shown in Fig. 28) in which the shape of the line showing the change in luminance differs between the left end and the right end of the moving object disappears. The defect in which parts which are brighter or darker than the original image, shown in Fig. 53, is solved.

In the seventh embodiment, the upper limit L1 of the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods and the upper limit L2 of the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the remaining sub frame periods are set to satisfy a relationship of L1? L2. . With the above setting, even when the assumed luminance of the input image signal is maximum, a luminance difference of more than a predetermined value can be provided between the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period. Thus, motion blur can be alleviated.

In the seventh embodiment, (a) a threshold level which is a reference to the gradation level of the image signal in each sub frame period, and (b) is increased or decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal, and then supplied to each sub frame period. The gradation level of the image signal is set so that the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated value of the display luminance in one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. With this setting, images can be displayed in a gradation representation having a gamma luminance characteristic suitable for the input image signal.

In the seventh embodiment, (a) a threshold level as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal in each sub frame period, and (b) an increase or decrease (e.g., multiplied by a predetermined value) according to the gradation level of the input image signal The gradation level of the image signal supplied to each sub frame period after the operation may be set according to the temperature level signal from the temperature sensor IC 20 for sensing the temperature of the display panel 10 or the temperature thereof. . With this setting, even when the display panel 10 uses a liquid crystal material, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the brightness sensed by the observer's eye can be maintained regardless of the temperature condition.

In the seventh embodiment, when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period can be set as follows. In each of the two colors (e.g., green and blue) other than the color (e.g., red) having the highest gradation level of the input image signal, the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period are displayed. The gradation levels are set such that the ratio of the luminance level is equal to the ratio of the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the luminance level displayed in the second sub frame period, of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. With this setting, the luminance ratio between the colors is kept at an appropriate value, so that the degradation of the image quality due to an incorrect color balance can be prevented.

Example 8

In Embodiment 8 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during three sub frame periods. In the sub frame period which is at the center (center sub frame period) of one frame period in time, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of an image signal of the maximum gradation level or an input image signal is supplied. In each of the sub frame period before the center sub frame period and the sub frame period after the center sub frame period, an image signal of a minimum gradation level or an image signal of gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal is supplied. . The center of time of one frame period is also referred to as the "temporal center".

FIG. 41 is a block diagram of the structure of the controller LSI 40 (such as the display control unit shown in FIG. 1) in the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the controller LSI 40 is indicated by the reference numeral 40d.

As shown in Fig. 41, the controller LSI 40d includes a line buffer 41 (line data memory section), a timing controller 42 (timing control section), and frame memory data selection means 43 (frame memory data selection section). Gradation conversion source selection means 52 (gradation conversion source selection section), first gradation conversion circuit 44 (first gradation conversion section), second gradation conversion circuit 45 (second gradation conversion section), and Output data selecting means 46 (output data selecting means section).

The line buffer 41 receives input image signals one horizontal line and temporarily stores the input image signals. The line buffer 41 includes a receiving port and a transmitting port independently, and thus can transmit and receive signals simultaneously.

The frame memory data selecting means 43 is controlled by the timing controller 42 so as to transmit the input image signal stored in the line buffer 41 to the frame memory 30 one by one horizontal line. The input image signal stored in the line buffer 41 is also transmitted to the gradation conversion source selecting means 52.

Alternately with data transfer to the frame memory 30, the timing controller 42 reads out image signals previously stored and stored in the frame memory 30 by one horizontal line from two vertical positions on the screen. Next, the timing controller 42 switches the frame memory data selection means 43 so that the read image signal is transmitted to the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and the gradation conversion source selecting means 52. At this time, the image signal before 1/4 frame is read out from the frame memory 30 and transmitted to the first gradation converting circuit 44, and the image signal before 3/4 frame is read out from the frame memory 30 to perform gradation conversion. It is sent to the source selection means 52.

The gradation conversion source selecting means 52 selects the image signal from the frame memory data selecting means 43 from the frame memory data selecting means 43 or the image signal from the line buffer 41 in accordance with the display timing. Controlled by The gradation conversion source selecting means 52 transmits the selected image signal to the second gradation conversion circuit 45.

The first gradation conversion circuit 44 converts the gradation level of the image signal before 1/4 frame supplied from the frame memory data selecting means 43 into the maximum gradation level or the input image signal (as in the fourth embodiment). Converts to a gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level.

The second gradation conversion circuit 45 sets the gradation level of the image signal before 3/4 frame supplied from the gradation conversion source selecting means 52 to the minimum gradation level or the input image signal (as in the fourth embodiment). Converts to a gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level.

The output data selecting means 46 is controlled by the timing controller 42 to select the image signal from the second gradation conversion circuit 45 or the image signal from the first gradation conversion circuit 44 according to the display timing. do. The output data selecting means 46 sends the selected image signal to the image display section as a panel image signal.

The operation of the image display device in Embodiment 8 including the controller LSI 40d having the above structure will be described.

Fig. 42 is a timing diagram of signals of the image display device in Example 8 for each horizontal period. In FIG. 42, an image signal for the first horizontal line is input through the third horizontal line of the Nth frame.

In Fig. 42, each rectangular block represents a transmission period of one frame of an image signal. The characters in parentheses [] indicate horizontal lines and frames on which the image signal being transmitted is output. For example, [f, 1] indicates that the image signal in the first horizontal line of the f'th frame is being transmitted. [N, 2] indicates that the image signal input to the second horizontal line of the Nth frame is being transmitted. The M1th line is a horizontal line spaced vertically by a quarter of the screen from the first horizontal line on the screen. In the eighth embodiment, the Ml line is a horizontal line driven by the first gate voltage line of the second gate driver 14b. The M2th line is a horizontal line spaced vertically by 3/4 of the screen from the first horizontal line on the screen. In the eighth embodiment, the M2th line is a horizontal line driven by the first gate voltage line of the fourth gate driver 14d. &Quot; C1 " indicates that the image signal converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is being transmitted from the input image signal input to the frame and horizontal line shown in the parenthesis [] immediately after. &Quot; C2 &quot; indicates that the image signal converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45 is being transmitted from the input image signal input to the frame and horizontal line shown in the immediately following parenthesis [].

In operation, as indicated by the arrow D1 in FIG. 42, the input image signal is first received by the line buffer 41 one by one horizontal line.

In parallel with this, as shown by arrow D3, one horizontal line image signal stored in the frame memory 30 previous to one quarter of the screen from the image signal currently input in the vertical direction is transferred from the frame memory 30. It is read out and supplied to the first gradation conversion circuit 44. The image signal is converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and output as a panel image signal. Similarly, from the image signal currently input, in the vertical direction, one horizontal line image signal stored in the frame memory 30 before three quarters of the screen is read out from the frame memory 30 and the second gradation conversion circuit 45 Is supplied. The image signal is converted by the second gray scale conversion circuit 45 and output as a panel image signal to the image display section. One horizontal line of the image signal which is currently input and received by the line buffer 41 is written into the frame memory 30 as indicated by arrow D2, and is further supplied to the second gradation conversion circuit 45. The image signal is converted by the second gray scale conversion circuit 45 and output as a panel image signal.

One horizontal line of the panel image signal is output from the controller LSI 40d and transmitted to the first to fourth source drivers 13a to 13d by a clock signal. Next, when the latch pulse signal is provided, the display voltage corresponding to the display brightness of each pixel portion is output from each source voltage line. At this time, a vertical shift clock signal or a gate start pulse signal is supplied to the gate driver along the horizontal line, to which charge (display voltage) is supplied on the source voltage line for image display, as necessary. Accordingly, the corresponding gate voltage line is placed in the ON state. In the gate driver not used for image display, the permission signal is set at the LOW level, whereby the corresponding gate voltage line is set to the OFF state. In this manner, during the period in which one horizontal line of the image signal is input, three horizontal lines of the image signals are transmitted to the display panel for image display. The operation is repeated.

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 42, as indicated by arrow D4, the M2th line (one horizontal line) of the image signal of the (N-1) th frame is transmitted to the source driver. Next, as indicated by arrow D5, the permission signal from the controller LSI 40d to the fourth gate driver 14d is set to the HIGH level. As indicated by arrows D6 and D7, the start pulse signal and the vertical shift clock signal are supplied to the fourth gate driver 14d. As a result, as shown by arrow D8, the TFT 12d connected to the first gate voltage line of the fourth gate driver 14d (display position corresponding to the M2 line on the screen) is placed in the ON state. . In this way, image display is performed. At this time, the permission signal to the first to third gate drivers 14a, 14b, and 14c that are not at the display position is set at a LOW level, and the TFT connected to the first to third gate drivers 14a, 14b, and 14c. 12b is in the OFF state.

Next, as indicated by arrow D9, the M1th line (1 horizontal line) of the image signal of the (N-1) th frame is transmitted to the source driver. Next, as indicated by arrow D10, the permission signal from the controller LSI 40d to the second gate driver 14b is set to the HIGH level. As shown by arrows D10 and D11, the start pulse signal and the vertical shift clock signal are supplied to the second gate driver 14b. As a result, as shown by arrow D13, the TFT 12b connected to the second gate voltage line of the first gate driver 14b (corresponding to the M1 line on the screen in the display position) is placed in the ON state. . In this way, image display is performed. At this time, the permission signals to the first, third and fourth gate drivers 14a, 14c, and 14d that are not in the display position are set at the LOW level, and the first, third and fourth gate drivers 14a, 14c, The TFT 12b connected to 14d) is in an OFF state.

Next, as indicated by arrow D14, the first line (one horizontal line) of the image signal of the Nth frame is transmitted to the source driver. Next, as indicated by arrow D15, the permission signal from the controller LSI 40d to the first gate driver 14a is set to the HIGH level. As indicated by arrows D16 and D17, the start pulse signal and the vertical shift clock signal are supplied to the first gate driver 14a. As a result, as shown by arrow D18, the TFT 12b connected to the first gate voltage line of the first gate driver 14a (display position corresponding to the first line on the screen) is placed in the ON state. . In this way, image display is performed. At this time, the permission signals to the second to fourth gate drivers 14b, 14c, and 14d that are not at the display position are set at the LOW level, and are connected to the TFTs connected to the second to fourth gate drivers 14b, 14c, and 14d. 12b is in the OFF state.

FIG. 43 shows how image signals on the screen are rewritten by repeating the display control shown in FIG. Specifically, Fig. 43 shows how the image signals are rewritten in the period in which the image signals for the Nth frame and the (N + 1) th frame are input.

In Fig. 43, the inclined arrow indicates the timing and vertical position at which one horizontal line of the image signal is rewritten. Ci [f] indicates that the image signal for the f'th frame is displayed by the image signal converted by the i &lt; th &gt; gradation conversion circuit (the first gradation conversion circuit 44 or the second gradation conversion circuit 45). Indicates. The image display information is stored until the image signal for the same line is rewritten. In FIG. 43, white areas indicate positions where image display information converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is stored, and shaded areas hold image display information converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45. In FIG. Indicates locations that will be The dotted lines represent the boundaries between the first to fourth gate drivers 14a to 14d that are driven.

Note that the vertical position of one horizontal line on the screen is as follows: Image display is performed by an image signal converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 for 1/2 frame; During each quarter frame before and after the 1/2 frame, image display is performed by the image signal converted by the second gray scale conversion circuit 45. The first quarter of one frame period is referred to as the first sub frame period, the subsequent half frame period is referred to as the second sub frame period, and the last quarter frame period is referred to as the third sub frame period. do.

As shown in Fig. 42, when one frame of the image signal is input, (a) a period during which the image signal converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44 is used for display, and (b) the second gradation conversion. The period in which the image signal converted by the circuit 45 is used for display is both 1/2 frame period. Therefore, the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and the second gradation conversion circuit 45 can convert the image signals so that the converted gradation level has substantially the same relationship as the gradation level of the input image signal as in the fourth embodiment. have. As a result, motion blur is reduced to improve the quality of the moving image, and an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic is obtained.

In displaying an image of an object moving in the lateral direction together with a still background using the image display device and method of the eighth embodiment, when the gradation level of the input image signal is low enough, The minimum gray level is supplied to the first sub frame period and the third sub frame period for both of the display sections. Therefore, as in the case of the image display apparatus employing the minimum (luminance) insertion system shown in Figs. 50 and 51, the movement blur is reduced and the quality of the moving object is improved.

FIG. 44 shows the change in luminance with time of one horizontal line on the screen when an object moves in the lateral direction together with a still background in the image display apparatus of the eighth embodiment. The display luminance levels of the moving object and the still background are the same as in the case of Fig. 27 (Example 4).

In Fig. 44, the horizontal axis represents the luminance state (the position of the pixel portion in the horizontal direction) in the horizontal direction of the screen, and the vertical axis represents time. Fig. 44 shows images displayed on the screen in three frames.

In FIG. 44, each one frame period T101 includes three sub frame periods T301 (first sub frame period), T302 (second sub frame period), and T303 (third sub frame period). In the display portion B of the still background, the gradation level of the input image signal is low. Therefore, in the second sub frame period T302, the display portion B is in the lit state at the luminance of 40% by the image signal of the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation of the input image signal. In the first and third sub frame periods T301 and T303, the display portion B is turned off at the minimum luminance of 0%. In the display portion A of the moving object, the gradation level of the input image signal is sufficiently high. Therefore, in the second sub frame period T302, the display portion A is in the lit state at the luminance of 100%. In the first and third sub frame periods T301 and T303, the display portion A is in the lit state at the luminance of 20% by the image signal of the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The number together with "% " indicates the luminance level of the image for the maximum display capability of 100%. For example, the number enclosed by the dotted lines for C represents 0% luminance.

FIG. 45 shows the luminance distribution of the image shown in FIG. 44 as seen by the observer's eye looking at the moving object.

As shown by the point source shown in Fig. 28 (Example 4), the phenomenon in which the shape of the line showing the change in luminance differs between the left end and the right end of the moving object is solved. The defect in which parts which are brighter or darker than the original image, shown in Fig. 53, is eliminated.

In the eighth embodiment (as in the fourth embodiment), after (a) the threshold which is a reference for the gradation level of the image signal in each sub frame period, and (b) it increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal, The gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period may be set according to the temperature level signal from the temperature sensor IC 20 which senses the temperature of the display panel 10 or the temperature of the vicinity thereof. With this setting, even when a liquid crystal material is used for the display panel 10, the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the brightness sensed by the observer's eye can be maintained regardless of the temperature condition.

In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the input image signal contains a plurality of color components, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period can be set as follows. In each of two colors (e.g., green and blue) other than the color (e.g. red) having the highest gradation level of the input image signal, the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the luminance displayed in the second sub frame period The gradation levels are set so that the ratio between the levels is equal to the ratio between the luminance level displayed in the first sub frame period and the luminance level displayed in the second sub frame period, of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal. . With this setting, the luminance ratio between the colors is kept at a predetermined value, and the degradation of the image quality due to the incorrect color balance can be prevented.

According to the image display apparatuses of Embodiments 1 to 7 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during two sub frame periods. According to the image display apparatus in Embodiment 8 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during three sub frame periods. The present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to an image display apparatus which performs one frame of image display by summing time-integrated values of luminance during n sub frame periods (n is an integer of 2 or more).

For example, during the n sub frame period (n is an integer of 2 or more), one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance. In the sub frame period temporally in the center of one frame period (when n is odd) or near the center (when n is even), an image signal of the following gradation level is supplied: n sub frame The maximum gradation level within the range where the sum of the time-integrated luminance levels in the period does not exceed the luminance level of the input image signal (the sub-frame period closest to or centered in the center of one frame period in time is "center sub-frame period. Is referred to as "). If the sum of the time-integrated luminance levels in the center sub frame period still does not reach the luminance level of the input image signal, the image signal of the next gradation level is supplied to each sub frame period before and after the center sub frame period: The maximum gradation level within the range where the sum of the time-integrated luminance levels in the n sub frame period does not exceed the gradation level of the input image signal. (The sub frame period before the center sub frame period is a "preceding sub frame period", where the center sub The sub frame period after the frame period is referred to as a "following sub frame period".) The image signal can be supplied simultaneously to the preceding sub frame period and the subsequent sub frame period. Alternatively, the image signal may be supplied first in the preceding sub frame period and then in the subsequent sub frame period. Alternatively, the image signal may be supplied first in the subsequent sub frame period and then in the preceding sub frame period. If the sum of the time-integrated luminance levels in the center sub frame period, the preceding sub frame period, and the subsequent sub frame period still does not reach the luminance level of the input image signal, the image signal of the next gradation level is before the preceding sub frame period. Supplied to each of the sub frame period and the sub frame period after the subsequent sub frame period: the maximum gradation level within a range in which the sum of time-integrated luminance levels in the n sub frame periods does not exceed the luminance level of the input image signal. The above operation is repeated until the sum of time-integrated luminance levels in all sub frame periods to which image signals are supplied reaches the luminance level of the input image signal. When this occurs, the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining sub frame period (s).

When " n " is an odd number of 3 or more, for example, as shown below, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance for n sub frame periods. The sub frame periods may include a first sub frame period, a second sub frame period,... From a first sub frame period in time or from a last sub frame period in time. It is referred to as the nth sub frame period. The temporally centered sub frame period is referred to as the "m th sub frame period" (m = (n + 1) / 2). The number of (n + 1) / 2 − threshold levels is provided as a reference for the gradation level of the input image signal. The threshold levels are T1, T2,... From the minimum threshold level. , T [(n + 1) / 2]. When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than T1, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the m subframe period, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining sub frame period. Supplied to the field. When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T1 and less than T2, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is supplied in the mth sub-frame period, and the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is It is supplied to each of the (m-1) sub frame period and the (m + 1) th sub frame period, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining sub frame periods. When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is applied to each of the mth subframe period, the (m-1) th subframe period, and the (m + 1) th subframe period. The image signal of the gradation level which is supplied and increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to each of the (m-2) th subframe period and the (m + 2) th subframe period, and the minimum gradation level Is supplied to the remaining frame periods. In this manner, when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T _{x -1} (x is an integer of 4 or more) and is less than or equal to T _x , the image signal of the maximum gradation level is the [m- (x-2)] sub frame period. To the [m + (x-2)] sub-frame periods, the image signal having the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is the [m- (x-1)] sub-frame period. And [m + (x-1)] subframe periods, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining subframe periods.

When " n " is an even number of two or more, for example, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during n sub frame periods as follows. The sub frame periods may be derived from a first sub frame period in time or from a last sub frame period in time, and include a first sub frame period, a second sub frame period,... It is referred to as the nth sub frame period. The two sub frame periods closest to the temporal center are referred to as the "m1 sub frame period" (m1 = n / 2) and "m2 sub frame period" (m2 = n / 2 +1). n / 2-the number of threshold levels is provided as a reference for the gradation level of the input image signal. The threshold levels are T1, T2, ... from the minimum threshold level. , T [n / 2]. When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to T1, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to each of the m1 subframe period and the m2 subframe period, and the minimum gradation level Is supplied to the remaining sub frame periods. When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T1 or less than T2, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is supplied to each of the m1 subframe period and the m2 subframe period, and increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal. The image signal of the gradation level is supplied to each of the (m1-1) th subframe periods and the (m2 + 1) th subframe periods, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining subframe periods. When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is divided into m1 sub frame periods, m2 sub frame periods, (m1-1) sub frame periods, and (m2 +). 1) An image signal of a gradation level supplied to each of the sub frame periods and increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is divided into (m1-2) subframe periods and (m2 + 2) subframe periods. The image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to each of the remaining frame periods. In this manner, when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than Tx-1 (x is an integer of 4 or more) and is less than or equal to Tx, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is selected from the [m1- (x-2)] subframe period to the [ m2 + (x-2)] is supplied to each of the sub frame periods, and an image signal having a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is selected from the [m1- (x-1)] subframe period to the [th. m2 + (x-1)] is supplied to each of the sub frame periods, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied to the remaining sub frame periods.

The upper limit for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period can be determined as follows. First, second,... The upper limit for the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the nth sub frame periods is L1, L2,... It is referred to as Ln. The center of one frame period in time, or the nearest subframe period of the center is referred to as the jth subframe period. The upper limits are defined to satisfy the following relationship.

L [j-i] ≥L [j- (i + 1)];

L [j + i] ≥L [j + (i + 1)]

I is an integer of 0 or more and less than j.

The upper limits thus determined may be used as the maximum values of the gradation levels supplied in the respective sub frame periods.

With such control, the temporal center of display luminance can be fixed in the center of one frame period or the nearest position of the center in time. Therefore, it is caused by inadequate luminance or color balance, which occurs when the position of the temporal center of display luminance changes according to the gradation level of the input image signal (for example, as described in Japanese Laid-Open Publication No. 2001-296841). Deterioration of the image quality can be suppressed. Since the luminance levels between the sub frame periods are different, motion blur is reduced, so that the quality of moving images is improved. Even when the display is performed at the maximum gradation level, the reduction in the maximum luminance and contrast, which occurs with the minimum (luminance) insertion system (each one frame period includes the minimum luminance period), can be suppressed.

Example 9

In Embodiment 9 of the present invention, one frame of image display is performed by summing time-integrated values of luminance during two sub frame periods (i.e., the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period). Using a digital input system source driver can change the gamma luminance characteristics.

Also in the ninth embodiment, when the gradation level of the input image signal is 50% or less, instead of the minimum gradation level (0%), for example, an image signal of, for example, several gradation levels, is supplied in one of the two sub frame periods. When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than 50%, instead of the maximum gradation level (100%), for example, an image signal having a gradation level of several percent less than 100% is supplied in one of the two sub frame periods. The gradation levels are applied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period such that the gradation level of the image signal supplied in one of the two sub frame periods is equal to or less than half the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the remaining sub frame periods. Is assigned. In order to provide the effect of the present invention, the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the two sub frame periods is preferably 10% or less, preferably 2% or less of the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the remaining sub frame periods. More preferred. When the gradation level of the image signal supplied in one of the two sub frame periods is less than or equal to 2% of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the remaining sub frame period, for example, only one gradation level of the 256 gradation levels is in the two sub frame periods. Is provided in one.

60 is a block diagram illustrating the basic structure of an image display apparatus according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The same components as shown in FIG. 1 will be given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Fig. 60, the image display apparatus of the ninth embodiment basically has the same structure as the image display apparatus of the first embodiment, but mainly differs in the following points. The image display device of Embodiment 9 includes digital input source drivers 13Da to 13Dd instead of the source drivers 13a to 13d, and gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21 instead of the temperature sensor IC 20. setting switch, gamma luminance characteristic setting section). The gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21 switches the gamma luminance characteristic to "2.1", "2.2", or "2.3". The image display device of Embodiment 9 also includes a controller LSI 40E for switching the gamma luminance characteristic using the gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21 to perform display control. In FIG. 60, a gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21 is provided instead of the temperature sensor IC 20. In FIG. Alternatively, the gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21 and the temperature sensor IC 20 may be provided together.

The digital input system source drivers 13Da to 13Dd respectively receive panel image signals as digital display data, select one of the preset voltages according to the value of each digital display data, and output the selected voltage as a gray scale voltage. . For example, for an 8-bit input system source driver, 256 gray voltages that can be output are preset. By one of 256 values (0 to 255) determined by the input 8-bit digital display data, each digital input system source driver selects a uniquely defined gradation voltage.

Fig. 61 is a block diagram of the structure of the controller LSI 40E (shown as the display control section in Fig. 60).

As shown in Fig. 61, the controller LSI 40E includes a line buffer 41 (line data memory section), a timing controller 42 (timing control section), frame memory data selecting means 43 (frame memory data selecting section), and gamma. First gray level conversion circuit 44E (first gray level conversion section) for receiving the luminance characteristic setting signal, second gray level conversion circuit 45E (second gray level conversion section) for receiving the gamma luminance characteristic setting signal, and output data Selection means 46 (output data selection section).

The line buffer 41 receives the input image signal horizontal line by the horizontal line, and temporarily stores the input image signal. Since the line buffer 41 includes a receiving port and a transmitting port independently, the line buffer 41 can transmit and receive signals simultaneously.

The timing controller 42 controls the frame memory data selecting means 43 to alternately select data transfer to the frame memory 30 or data read from the frame memory 30. The timing controller 42 also controls the output data selecting means 46 to alternately select the data output from the first gradation conversion circuit 44 or the data output from the second gradation conversion circuit 45. That is, the timing controller 42 selects the first sub frame period or the second sub frame period for the output data selecting means 46 as described later in detail.

The frame memory data selecting means 43 is controlled by the timing controller 42 to alternately select data transmission or data reading. In the data transfer, the frame memory data selecting means 43 transfers the input image signal stored in the line buffer 41 to the frame memory 30 for each horizontal line. In the data readout, the frame memory data selecting means 43 reads out an input image signal read out one frame period before each horizontal line and stored in the frame memory 30, and reads out the read data to the second gray scale conversion circuit 45E. send.

The first gradation conversion circuit 44E converts the gradation level of the input image signal supplied from the line buffer 41 into the gradation level for the first sub frame period according to the lookup table.

The second gradation conversion circuit 45E converts the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame data selecting means 43 into the gradation level for the second sub frame period in accordance with the lookup table.

In Embodiment 9, the first gradation conversion circuit 44 and the second gradation conversion circuit 45 work with lookup tables that store output values for input values. One of the gradation levels is selected by three types of lookup tables which are determined by the gamma value from the gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21 to determine the output values. Alternatively, the output values may also be obtained by the calculation circuit by selecting a calculation formula.

The output data selecting means 46 alternately selects the image signal output from the first gradation conversion circuit 44E or the image signal output from the second gradation conversion circuit 45E for each horizontal line by the timing controller 42. Controlled to. The output data selecting means 46 outputs an image signal selected as the panel image signal.

The operation of the image display device of Embodiment 9 is substantially the same as that of the image display device of Embodiment 1, except that digital input system source drivers 13Da to 13Dd are used instead of source drivers 13a to 13d. This will not be described in detail.

In Embodiment 9, the sub frame period α is allocated to the second sub frame period. The gradation level of the image signal is converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45E: if the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level that is uniquely determined, the image of the gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal The signal is supplied in the sub frame period α; If the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level uniquely determined, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is supplied in the sub frame period α. When the image signal of the maximum gradation level is supplied, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in either of the two sub frame periods is less than half of the gradation level of the image supplied in the other sub frame period, preferably 10% or less, More preferably, it is 2% or less.

The sub frame period β is allocated to the first sub frame period. The gradation level of the image signal is converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44E: If the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level uniquely determined, the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied in the sub frame period β. ; If the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level uniquely determined, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is supplied in the sub frame period α. When the image signal of the minimum gradation level is supplied, the gradation level of the image signal supplied in either of the two sub frame periods is less than half, preferably 10% or less, of the gradation level of the image supplied in the other sub frame periods, More preferably, it is 2% or less.

Hereinafter, a method of allocating grayscale levels to the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period will be described.

In Embodiment 9, a 5-bit digital input system source driver will be used as an example, but the number of bits of the source driver is not particularly limited. Typically, an 8-bit input system source driver capable of displaying 256 gradation levels is used.

The luminance level of the display panel 10 (the liquid crystal display panel) is a relationship between the output gray voltage and the voltage-transmittance characteristic (VT characteristic) of the liquid crystal display panel 10 according to the digital display data input to the source drivers 13Da to 13Dd. Determined by In Embodiment 9, the source drivers 13Da to 13Dd are 5-bit digital input systems, and the gradation voltage is set so that the luminance levels of the liquid crystal display panel 10 are as shown in Table 1 for the input digital data. In other words, the reference voltages are set such that the gamma luminance characteristic of the source drivers 13Da to 13Dd is 2.2.

Table 1

In Embodiment 9, the gamma luminance characteristic of the image display device is changed by appropriately combining the gradation levels for the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period using the digital input system source drivers 13Da to 13Dd. A plurality of general image signals are output with a gamma value of 2.2 in consideration of the gamma luminance characteristic of the CRT which is mainly used as a conventional display device. In the ninth embodiment, the gamma value (gamma luminance characteristic) can be selected as "2.1", "2.2", or "2.3" by the gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21. Thus, the optimum gamma luminance characteristic for the screen can be selected so that the image on the screen is easily seen.

Specifically, three lookup tables (a lookup table A for the gamma luminance characteristic of 2.2 and a lookup table B for the gamma luminance characteristic of 2.1) in each of the first grayscale conversion circuit 44E and the second grayscale conversion circuit 45E. , And one of the lookup tables C for the gamma luminance characteristic of 2.3 are selected according to the gamma luminance characteristic setting signal sent from the gamma luminance characteristic setting switch 21.

Table 2 shows the following correspondence in the lookup table A (gamma luminance characteristic: 2.2): digital data output to the source drivers 13Da to 13Dd in the gradation level of the input image signal, the first and second sub frame periods. , The gray level in the first and second sub frame periods, and the time integral value (detected brightness value) of the image brightness during the first and second sub frame periods.

Table 2

The relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the target luminance level of the image display device is expressed by the following equation.

Target luminance level of the image display device = (gradation level of the input image signal) ^γ equation (100)

Is the gamma luminance characteristic (gamma value set by the switch 21) of the image display apparatus.

The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period, and the time-integrated luminance (detected brightness value) during the first sub frame period and the second sub frame period are expressed by the following equation.

Time integral brightness (detected brightness value)

= {(Gradation level in the first sub frame period) ^Dγ + (gradation level in the second sub frame period) ^Dγ } / 2 equation (101)

Where Dγ = 2.2 (gamma luminance characteristic of the source driver).

62 shows six examples of the relationships shown in Table 2 having different target luminance levels.

As shown in Fig. 62, if the gradation level of the input image signal is less than 50%, for example 25.81, the detected brightness value is supplied to the gradation level (the second sub frame period which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal). ) And the gradation level (supplied in the first sub frame period) in the vicinity of the minimum gradation level. If the gradation level of the input image signal is 50% or more, for example, 74.19% or 83.67%, the detected brightness value is increased and decreased according to the gradation level of the input image signal (supplied in the first sub frame period). It is determined by the combination of the gradation levels (supplied in the second sub frame period) in the vicinity of the maximum gradation level.

Table 3 shows the correspondence described above in lookup table B. Table 4 shows the correspondence described above in lookup table C. In these cases, equations (100) and (101) are obtained. In lookup table B, gamma = 2.1. In lookup table C, gamma = 2.3.

Table 3

Table 4

The data of the lookup table used in the ninth embodiment is selected so that the error for the gamma luminance characteristic set for the image display device is within ± 1.5%.

Fig. 63 is a graph illustrating the relationship between the gradation level of the input image signal and the time-integrated luminance (detected brightness value) during the first and second sub frame periods when the lookup tables A to C are used.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the gradation level of the image signal is converted by the first gradation conversion circuit 44E: if the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to a threshold level uniquely determined, the gradation of the input image signal An image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the level is supplied; When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the image signal of the gradation level in the vicinity of the maximum gradation level is supplied. The gradation level of the image signal is converted by the second gradation conversion circuit 45E: if the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level uniquely determined, the gradation level in the vicinity of the minimum gradation level is supplied with the image signal. .; When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, an image signal of gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied. By such setting, the gamma luminance characteristic of the image display device can be changed. In other words, the gradation levels in the first and second sub frame periods are suitably combined to reduce the quality of the moving picture of the hold-type image display device without reducing the maximum value of the temporal integration luminance in any given one frame period. The gamma luminance characteristic of the image display device can be changed while reducing movement blur to improve.

In the ninth embodiment, the gamma luminance characteristic of the image display apparatus is an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of an input image signal, and an image signal of a gradation level near the minimum gradation level for each of the two sub frame periods. Is converted by supplying the image signal of the gradation level in the vicinity of the maximum gradation level and the gradation level of the gradation level of the input image signal for each of the two sub frame periods. Thus, the brightness value detected during one frame period is controlled. In addition, the image display device of Embodiment 9 is used for other purposes, for example, to correct the temperature of the liquid crystal display panel, or to correct the gradation level required when the use of different liquid crystal materials changes the VT characteristics. Can be used.

Example 10

In Embodiments 1 to 9, the image display control portion of the image display apparatus is provided by hardware such as controller LSI. In Embodiment 10, the image display control portion of the image display apparatus is provided by software.

64 is a block diagram of the structure of the image display control unit 40F provided by the computer.

As shown in Fig. 64, the image display control unit 40F is used for a display control program and display control for executing the image display method described in each of Examples 1 to 9 by the CPU 401, control unit, and computer. ROM 402 as a computer-readable medium storing data, and RAM 403 used as a work memory of the CPU 401.

Usable computer-readable media include, for example, memory devices such as various types of IC memory, hard disks (HD), optical disks (such as CD), and magnetic recording media (such as FD). The display control program and the data stored in the ROM 402 are transferred to the RAM 403 and executed by the CPU 401.

In order to display an image corresponding to one frame period, based on the data and display control program according to the present invention, the CPU 401 repeats the following process using the corresponding section.

In the sub-frame period closest to the center or the center of one frame period in time, the image signal of the maximum gradation level is within the range where the sum of the time-integrated luminance levels does not exceed the luminance level of the input image signal in the n sub-frame periods. The display panel 10 is supplied to the display panel 10. (The center or the subframe period closest to the center of one frame period in time is referred to as the "center subframe period.")

If the sum of the time integral luminance levels in the center sub frame period does not reach the luminance level of the input image signal, the maximum gradation level within the range where the sum of the time integral luminance levels in the n sub frame period does not exceed the luminance level of the input image signal. Is supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the sub frame periods before and after the center sub frame period. (The sub frame period before the center sub frame period is referred to as the " preceding sub frame period " and after the center sub frame period. Is referred to as a "following subframe period".)

If the sum of the time integral luminance levels in the center sub frame period, the preceding sub frame period, and the subsequent sub frame period does not reach the luminance level of the input image signal, the sum of the time integral luminance levels in the n sub frame period is the input image. The image signal of the maximum gradation level within the range not exceeding the luminance level of the signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the sub frame period before the preceding sub frame period and the sub frame period after the subsequent sub frame period.

This operation is repeated until the sum of the time-integrated luminance levels in all the sub frame periods to which the image signal is supplied reaches the luminance level of the input image signal. When this happens, the image signal of the minimum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level smaller than the predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the remaining sub frame period (s).

Alternatively, in order to display an image corresponding to one frame period by the sum of the time-integrated values of luminance for n sub frame periods, the CPU 401 responds based on the data and display control program according to the present invention. Repeat the next step using wealth.

The n sub frame period is represented by the first sub frame period, the second sub frame period, ..., the nth sub frame period from the earliest sub frame period in time or from the oldest sub frame period in time. The two sub frame periods closest to the center in time are represented by the "m1 sub frame period" and the "m2 sub frame period". The m first sub frame period is set to n / 2, and the m second sub frame period is set to n / 2 + 1. n / 2-the number of threshold levels is given by providing from T1, T2, ..., T [n / 2] from the smallest threshold level.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is T1 or less, an image signal of gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the m1th subframe period and the m2th subframe period. The image signal of the minimum gradation level or the gradation level of the predetermined gradation level or less is supplied to the display panel 10 in other sub frame periods.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T1 and less than or equal to T2, the image signal of the maximum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is displayed in the display panel 10 in each of the mth subframe period and the mth subframe period, respectively. ) Is supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the (m1-1) 'th sub-frame period and the (m2 + 1)' th sub-frame period. ) Is supplied to the display panel 10 in another sub frame period.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than T2 and less than or equal to T3, the image signal of the maximum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is the mth subframe period, the m2nd subframe period, and the (m1-1). The image signal of the gradation level supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the 'th sub frame period and the (m2 + 1)' th sub frame period, and which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is (m1-). 2) Subframes supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the 'th sub frame period and the (m2 + 2)' th sub frame period, wherein image signals of the minimum gradation level or image signals of the gradation level smaller than a predetermined value are different from each other. It is supplied to the display panel 10 in the period.

In this manner, if the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than Tx-1 (x is an integer of 4 or more) and is less than or equal to Tx, the image signal of the minimum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is obtained by [m1- (x). -2)] an image signal of a gradation level supplied to the display panel 10 in each of the 'th sub frame period to the [m2 + (x-2)]' th sub frame period, and increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. Is supplied in each of the [m1- (x-1)] 'th sub-frame period and the [m2 + (x-1)]' th sub-frame period, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level or the gradation level smaller than a predetermined value is supplied. The image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in another sub frame period.

Alternatively, in order to display an image corresponding to one frame period by the sum of the time-integrated values of luminance during the two sub frame periods, the CPU 401 is based on the data and display control program according to the present invention. Repeat the following procedure using the counterpart.

One of the two sub frame periods is denoted by the sub frame period α, and the other sub frame period is denoted by the sub frame period β. If the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level determined solely, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α, An image signal or an image signal having a gradation level smaller than a predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the image signal of the maximum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is supplied to the display panel in the sub frame period α, and is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal. The image signal of the gradation level is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

Alternatively, in order to display an image corresponding to one frame period by the sum of the time integral values of luminance during the two sub frame periods, the CPU 401 responds based on the data and display control program according to the present invention. Repeat the next step using wealth.

One of the two sub frame periods is represented by the sub frame period α, and the other sub frame period is represented by the sub frame period β. Threshold levels T1 and T2 of the gradation level in the two sub frame periods are defined. Threshold level T2 is greater than threshold level T1.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α, and the image signal of the minimum gradation level or An image signal having a gradation level smaller than a predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α, and the subframe An image signal of a gradation level lower than the gradation level supplied in the period α and increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

If the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T2, the image signal of the maximum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α, and the gradation of the input image signal The image signal of the gradation level increasing or decreasing in accordance with the level is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

Alternatively, in order to display an image corresponding to one frame period by the sum of the time-integrated values of luminance during the two sub frame periods, the CPU 401 uses a corresponding section based on the display control program and data according to the present invention. Repeat the following process.

One of the two sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta. Threshold levels T1 and T2 of the gradation level in the two sub frame periods are defined. Threshold level T2 is greater than threshold level T1. The gradation level L is uniquely defined.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level T1, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α, and the minimum gradation level is provided. Is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the image signal of the gradation level L is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α, and the gradation of the input image signal is An image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases with a level is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T2, an image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α. An image signal of gradation level or an image signal of gradation level larger than a predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

Alternatively, in order to display an image corresponding to one frame period by the sum of the time-integrated values of luminance during the two sub frame periods, the CPU 401 uses a corresponding section based on the display control program and data according to the present invention. Repeat the following process.

One of the two sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta.

Based on the images of two frames that are continuously input, an image of an intermediate state in time is generated through evaluation.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level determined uniquely, an image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α. When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the image signal of the maximum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α.

When the gradation level of the image signal in the intermediate state is lower than or equal to the threshold level, the image signal of the minimum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level smaller than the predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β. When the gradation level of the image signal in the intermediate state is greater than the threshold level, an image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the image signal in the intermediate state is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β. .

Alternatively, in order to display an image corresponding to one frame period by the sum of the time-integrated values of luminance during the two sub frame periods, the CPU 401 uses a corresponding section based on the display control program and data according to the present invention. Repeat the following process.

One of the two sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta.

When the gradation level of the input image signal is less than or equal to the threshold level determined uniquely, an image signal of the gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α. When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level, the image signal of the maximum gradation level or the image signal of the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period α.

When the average value of the gradation level of the image signal in the current frame period and the gradation level of the image signal input one frame before or after one frame is equal to or less than the threshold level, the image signal of the minimum gradation level or the image signal of gradation level smaller than the predetermined value Is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β. When the average value is larger than the threshold level, an image signal of a gradation level that increases or decreases in accordance with the average value is supplied to the display panel 10 in the sub frame period β.

According to the above description, movement blur of a moving image can be suppressed while suppressing the reduction in the maximum luminance or contrast.

Example 11

In Embodiment 11 of the present invention, a liquid crystal TV using the image display apparatus and the image display method described in Embodiments 1 to 10 will be described.

65 is a block diagram showing the structure of the liquid crystal TV 1000 of the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in Fig. 65, the liquid crystal TV 1000 includes the image display apparatus 1 described in Embodiments 1 to 10 and a tuner portion 1001 for selecting channels of TV broadcast signals. The TV broadcast signal of the channel selected by the tuner unit 1001 is input to the controller LSI 40 of the image display device 1 as an image signal.

By such a structure, the liquid crystal TV 1000 displays a high quality image in which movement blur of a moving image is suppressed while suppressing a decrease in maximum luminance or contrast.

Example 12

In Example 12 of this invention, the liquid crystal monitoring apparatus using the image display apparatus and image display method which were described in Example 1 thru | or 10 is demonstrated.

66 is a block diagram showing the structure of a liquid crystal monitoring device of Example 12;

As shown in Fig. 66, the liquid crystal monitoring device 2000 is a signal processing unit for processing monitor signals from the image display device 1 and the personal computer (PC) or other external device described in the first to tenth embodiments. (2001). The monitor signal from the signal processing unit 2001 is input to the controller LSI 40 of the image display apparatus 1 as an image signal.

By this structure, the liquid crystal monitoring apparatus 2000 displays a high quality image in which movement blur of a moving image is suppressed while suppressing the reduction in maximum brightness or contrast.

In Embodiment 1, display control is performed in each pixel portion on the screen. Also in Examples 2 to 9, display control is performed in each pixel portion on the screen.

In Embodiments 1 to 12, when there are three or more sub frame periods, the gradation level assigned to the center sub frame period in one frame period is larger than the gradation level assigned to the other sub frame periods. The luminance level assigned to the center sub frame period in one frame period is larger than the luminance level assigned to the other sub frame period. The center of gravity of the time-integrated luminance during the plurality of sub frame periods moves within one frame period.

In Embodiments 1 to 12, display control is performed while one frame period is divided into two or three sub frame periods. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention can be applied to display control performed in a state where one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub-frame periods (an integer of two or more). Hereinafter, various methods of allocating a luminance level of an input image signal to a plurality of sub frame periods will be described. The gradation level supplied in the sub frame period is adjusted to realize the luminance level for the input image signal.

In the following description, for clarity, the gradation level of the input image signal is allocated so that the gradation level gradually increases to a predetermined value. According to the present invention, such allocation is instantaneously performed by conversion or calculation, for example, using a look-up table or the like, based on the above-described assignment in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal.

67 through 71 are conceptual views illustrating various methods of allocating luminance levels for input image signals to a plurality of sub frame periods in the image display apparatus according to the present invention.

67 to 71, one frame includes a plurality of sub frame periods. Each stripe shape represents a sub frame period. The luminance level assigned to the sub frame period indicated by the dotted line region and the luminance level allocated to the sub frame period indicated by the shaded region were determined.

In Figure 67 (a), one frame is divided into n subframes, where n is an integer of 2 or more. n includes an odd number, but in this example, one frame is divided into six sub frame periods. As shown in the leftmost part of Fig. 67 (a), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, as indicated by the dots, in the temporal center or in the temporal center of one frame period for image display (as shown by dots). It starts from the nearest sub frame period. (In this example, the allocation of the luminance level is started from the left frame period of the two sub frame periods closest to the temporal center, but may be started from the right frame period of the two sub frame periods closest to the temporal center.) Fig. 67 ( If the sub frame period is filled with the luminance level (as shown by the shaded display) as shown second from the left part of a), during the two sub frame periods in which the luminance level is closest to the temporal center (as indicated by a dot). It is allocated to the right frame period. As shown in the center portion of Fig. 67 (a), when the sub frame period is filled with the luminance level (as in the shaded display), during the two sub frame periods in which the luminance level is closest to the temporal center (as shown by the dots). It is allocated to the left sub frame period. When the sub frame period is filled with the luminance level (as in the shaded display) as shown second from the right part of Fig. 67 (a), the two subs closest to the temporal center (as indicated by the dots) are the luminance levels. It is allocated to the right sub frame period in the frame period. This operation is repeated, and the luminance level for the input image signal is assigned to the sub frame period. The remaining luminance level is allocated to the remaining sub frame periods, so that the assigned luminance level becomes equal to the overall luminance level for the input image signal. Therefore, the assignment is completed.

In Figure 67 (b), one frame is divided into n sub frame periods, where n is an odd number of three or more. In this example, one frame is divided into five sub frame periods. As shown in the left part of Fig. 67 (b), the luminance level for the input image signal is assigned, starting from the sub frame period in the temporal center of the one frame period (the third from the left in this example) for image display. (Indicated by dots). The reference value for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level with respect to the input image signal is the threshold level (details will be described later). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal < the threshold level T1. As shown in the center of FIG. 67 (b), when the center sub frame period is filled with the luminance level (marked with shade; threshold level T1), the luminance level is the right sub frame period and the center sub frame of the center sub frame period. It is allocated to the left sub frame period of the frame period simultaneously (indicated by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T1 <gray level of the input image signal <threshold level T2. As shown in the right part of Fig. 67 (b), when these sub frame periods are filled with luminance levels (indicated by shading; threshold level T2), the luminance level is the sub frame period to the left of these sub frame periods and this sub frame period. It is assigned to the sub frame period to the right of the frame periods (indicated by the dots). At this time, the threshold level T2 is the gradation level of the input image signal. This operation is repeated. More specifically, the gradation level corresponding to the allocated luminance level is the threshold level T1 until the central sub frame period is filled with the luminance level. The gradation level corresponding to the allocated luminance level is the threshold level T2 until the left and right sub frame periods of the central sub frame period are filled with the luminance level. As the number of sub frame periods increases, the number of threshold levels also increases. By providing the threshold levels T1 and T2, decisions regarding control can be made quickly when allocating luminance levels.

In Figure 67 (c), one frame is divided into n subframes, where n is an even number of two or more. In this example, one frame is divided into six sub frame periods. As shown in the left part of Fig. 67 (c), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, as shown by the dots, and the two sub frame periods (in the temporal center of one frame period for image display) ( In this example, starting from the third and the fourth from the left) is simultaneously started. At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal < the threshold level T1. As shown in the center of Fig. 67 (c), when the central sub frame periods are filled with the luminance level (marked with a shade; threshold level T1), the luminance level is in the right and left sub frame periods of the central sub frame periods. Assigned at the same time (second and fifth in this example; denoted by dots). At this time, the threshold level T1 <gray level of the input image signal <threshold level T2. As shown in the right part of Fig. 67 (c), when these sub frame periods are filled with luminance levels (indicated by shading; threshold level T2), the luminance levels are the sub frame periods on the left and right of these sub frame periods. (In this example, leftmost and rightmost subframe periods; denoted by dots). At this time, the threshold level T2 is the gradation level of the input image signal. This operation is repeated.

In Figure 67 (d), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference value for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level of the input image signal is the threshold level T (details will be described later). As shown in the left part of Fig. 67 (d), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from one of the two sub frame periods (left in this example; indicated by dots). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). As shown in the right part of Fig. 67 (d), when the left sub frame period is filled with the luminance level (marked with a shade; the threshold level T), the luminance level is assigned to the right sub frame period (indicated by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T <gradation level of the input image signal. The gradation level corresponding to the luminance level that can be assigned to one of the sub frame periods is the threshold level T.

In Figure 68 (e), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference values for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level of the input image signal are the threshold levels T1 and T2. As shown in the left part of Fig. 68 (e), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from one of two sub frame periods (left in this example; indicated by dots). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal is <the threshold level T1. As shown in the center of Fig. 68 (e), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 of the left sub frame period, the luminance level becomes the right sub frame period as well as the left sub frame period. It is also assigned to the frame period (indicated by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T1 <gray level of the input image signal <threshold level T2. As shown in the right part of Fig. 68 (e), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T2 of the left sub frame period, the remaining luminance level is allocated to the right sub frame period. (Indicated by a dot), the assignment is completed. At this time, the threshold level T2 is the gradation level of the input image signal.

In Figure 68 (f), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference values for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level of the input image signal are the threshold levels T1 and T2. As shown in the left part of Fig. 68 (f), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from one of two sub frame periods (left in this example; indicated by dots). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal < the threshold level T1. As shown in the center of FIG. 68 (f), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 of the left sub frame period, the luminance level assigned to the left sub frame period is temporarily It is fixed (i.e. pauses allocation), and the luminance level for the input image signal is assigned to another sub frame period (right in this example; denoted by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T1 <gray level of the input image signal <threshold level T2. As shown in the right part of Fig. 68 (f), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T2 of the right sub frame period, the luminance level assigned to the left sub frame period is fixed. Released from the state, the remaining luminance level is assigned to the left sub frame period (indicated by the dot). Therefore, the assignment is completed. At this time, the threshold level T2 is the gradation level of the input image signal. In this way the center of gravity is averaged.

In Fig. 68 (g), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference value for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level with respect to the input image signal is the threshold level (T). As shown in the left part of Fig. 68 (g), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from one of two sub frame periods (left in this example; indicated by dots). At this time, the gray level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). As shown in the right part of Fig. 68 (g), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T of the left sub frame period, the luminance level assigned to the left sub frame period is maximized. At the same time, the luminance level is allocated to the right sub frame period in consideration of the image format of the next one frame. More specifically, it is checked whether there is a difference (i.e., there is a shift) between the image currently input and the image to be input next. If there is a difference, the remaining luminance level is assigned to the right sub frame period, so that the luminance level for the input image signal in the intermediate state in time between the image currently input and the image to be input next is (Ie, an image between two images is estimated). The left sub frame period is then filled with the luminance level (threshold level T). At this time, the threshold level T < the gradation level of the input volcanic signal. In this way the generation of pseudo profiles is suppressed.

In Figure 68 (h), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference value for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level with respect to the input image signal is the threshold level (T). As shown in the left part of Fig. 68 (h), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from one of two sub frame periods (left in this example; indicated by dots). At this time, the gray level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). As shown in the right part of Fig. 68 (h), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T of the left sub frame period, the luminance level assigned to the left sub frame period is maximized. do. At the same time, the average value of the currently input image and the next input image is calculated, and the remaining luminance level for the average input image signal is assigned to another sub frame period (right in this example). Subsequently, the left sub frame period is filled with the luminance level (threshold level T). At this time, the threshold level T <gradation level of the input image signal.

69 (i) shows the case where the sub frame periods have different lengths. 69 (j) shows the case where the sub frame periods have the same length. The shorter the length of the sub frame period, the longer the impulse effect is obtained. If the sub frame period is longer, the center of luminance tends to be closer to the longer sub frame period and does not move easily. By this characteristic, the effect provided by the center of luminance and the impulse effect can be changed, for example, by increasing or decreasing the sub frame period at a predetermined position (for example, the sub frame period at the temporal center of one frame period). . Figure 69 (i) is applicable to Figures 67 (a) through 68 (h). Figure 69 (j) is applicable to Figure 67 (b).

In Fig. 69 (k), the allocation method is substantially the same as in Fig. 68 (e) except for the following. In addition to the operation in Fig. 68 (e), the luminance level is allocated so that the difference between the luminance level or the gradation level allocated to the left subframe period and the luminance level or the gradation level allocated to the right subframe period is constant. This will be described in detail below.

One frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference values for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level of the input image signal are the threshold levels T1 and T2. As shown in the left part of Fig. 69 (k), the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from one of two sub frame periods (left in this example; indicated by dots). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal < the threshold level T1. As shown in the center of FIG. 69 (k), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T1 of the left sub frame period, the luminance level is also assigned to the right sub frame period (dot) ). More specifically, the luminance level is simultaneously assigned to the left sub frame period and the right sub frame period at the same speed, so that the difference between the brightness level or the gradation level assigned to the left sub frame period and the right sub frame period becomes constant. At this time, the threshold level T1 <gray level of the input image signal <threshold level T2. As shown in the right part of Fig. 69 (k), when the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the threshold level T2 of the left subframe, the remaining luminance level is allocated to the right subframe period. (Marked with dots), the assignment is completed. At this time, the threshold level T2 is the gradation level of the input image signal.

In Fig. 69 (l), the allocation method is substantially the same as in the case of Fig. 69 (k) except for the following. The luminance level is assigned to the left sub frame period and the right sub frame period, so that a difference between the luminance level or gradation level assigned to the left sub frame period and the luminance level or gradation level assigned to the right sub frame period is determined by a predetermined function. Will follow. This function includes a constant value equal to the difference in the case of Fig. 69 (k), and also includes a value obtained by multiplying the constant by a predetermined coefficient that defines the method of assigning the luminance levels. Fig. 69 (l) is applicable to Figs. 68 (e) and 68 (f).

Fig. 70 (m) relates to the response speed of the liquid crystal material. If the response time of the liquid crystal material with respect to the increase in brightness is different from the response time of the liquid crystal material with the decrease in brightness, whether the allocation should start from the first sub frame period or from the second sub frame period in order to cause less damage. It is checked if it should start. In this example, the allocation of the luminance level starts from the second sub frame period when the response time of the liquid crystal material to the luminance increase> the response time of the liquid crystal material to the luminance decrease. The allocation of the luminance level starts from the first sub frame period when the response time of the liquid crystal material with respect to the luminance increase < Fig. 70 (m) is applicable to Fig. 67 (d) to Fig. 68 (h).

Here, Fig. 70 (m) is applied to Fig. 67 (d). When the response time of the liquid crystal material to the luminance increase> the response time of the liquid crystal material to the luminance decrease, the luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from the second (right) sub frame period of the two sub frame periods (dot) ). At this time, the gray level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). When the second sub frame period is filled with the luminance level, the luminance level is allocated to the first (left) sub frame period (indicated by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T <gradation level of the input image signal. When the response time of the liquid crystal material with respect to the luminance increase is less than the response time of the liquid crystal material with the luminance decrease, the luminance level of the input image signal is allocated, starting from the first (left) sub frame period of the two sub frame periods (point ). At this time, the gray level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). When the first sub frame period is filled with the luminance level, the luminance level is assigned to the second (right) sub frame period (indicated by the dot). At this time, the threshold level T <gradation level of the input image signal.

70 (n) shows the response speed of the display element. The maximum luminance level of the display element is Lmax, and the minimum luminance level of the display element is Lmin. If the response time of the display element for the luminance switching from Lmax to Lmin is different from the response time of the display element for the luminance switching from Lmin to Lmax, whether the allocation should start from the first sub frame period in order to cause less damage Or it is checked whether to start from the second sub frame period. In this example, when the response time of the display element for brightness switching from Lmin to Lmax (increase in brightness)> The response time of the display device for brightness switching from Lmax to Lmin (in decreasing brightness) It starts from 2 sub frame periods. When the response time of the display element in response to the luminance switching from Lmin to Lmax (increased luminance) is less than the response time of the display element in response to the luminance change from Lmax to Lmin (luminance decreased), the allocation of the luminance level is performed in the first subframe. Start from the period. Fig. 70 (n) is applicable to Fig. 67 (d) to Fig. 68 (h).

In Fig. 70 (o), an upper limit value L for the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level to be allocated to the sub frame period is set. Fig. 70 (o) is applicable to Figs. 67 (a) to 68 (h).

For example, as in the case of Fig. 67 (d), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference value for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level with respect to the input image signal is the threshold level (T). The luminance level for the input image signal is assigned, starting from one of the two sub frame periods (indicated by a dot). At this time, the gray level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level for the input image signal reaches the upper limit L (as indicated by hatching; threshold level T), the luminance level is assigned to another sub frame period (indicated by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T <gradation level of the input image signal.

In Fig. 70 (p), the upper limit values L1, L2, and L3 for the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level to be allocated to the sub frame periods are set. The upper limit values L1, L2, and L3 become higher as the sub frame period is closer to the temporal center of one frame period. Fig. 70 (p) is applicable to Figs. 67 (a) to 67 (c).

For example, as in the case of Fig. 67 (b), one frame is divided into n sub frame periods, where n is an odd number of three or more. In this example, one frame is divided into five sub frame periods. The luminance level for the input image signal is allocated, starting from the sub frame period (third from the left in this example) in the temporal center of one frame period (indicated by the dot). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal is <threshold level. When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level of the center subframe period reaches the maximum upper limit l1 (marked with shade; threshold level T1), the luminance level is the right subframe period of the center subframe period and the center subframe. It is assigned to the left subframe period of the period at the same time (indicated by a dot). At this time, the threshold level T1 <gray level of the input image signal <threshold level T2. When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level of this sub frame period reaches the second highest upper limit value l2 (displayed by shade; threshold level T2), the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level of these sub frame periods reaches the lowest upper limit value l3. The luminance level is assigned (indicated by dots) to the sub frame period to the left of these sub frame periods and to the sub frame period to the right of these sub frame periods until it arrives. At this time, the threshold level T2 is the gradation level of the input image signal. The upper limit L3 <upper limit L2 <upper limit L1.

In Fig. 71 (q), the upper limit values L1 and L2 for the gradation level corresponding to the luminance levels to be allocated to the sub frame periods are set, and the upper limit L1 is higher than the upper limit L2. Fig. 71 (q) is applicable to Figs. 67 (d) to 68 (h).

For example, as in the case of Fig. 67 (d), one frame is divided into two sub frame periods. The reference value for allocating the gradation level in the sub frame period corresponding to the luminance level with respect to the input image signal is the threshold level (T). The luminance level for the input image signal is assigned, starting from one of the two sub frame periods (indicated by a dot). At this time, the gradation level of the input image signal < the threshold level (T). When the gradation level corresponding to the luminance level reaches the high limit L1 (displayed by shade; threshold level T), the luminance level is allocated in the right sub frame period until the luminance level reaches the low limit L2 (indicated by a dot). box). At this time, the threshold level T <gradation level of the input image signal. Also, the upper limit L2> the upper limit L1.

By providing the upper limit L as shown in Figs. 70 (o) to 71 (q), the luminance levels of all sub frame periods do not become 100% even when the gradation level of the input image signal is maximum. Thus, the impulse effect can be provided as with a minimal (luminance) insertion system. In the case where the upper limit becomes higher as the sub frame period is closer to the temporal center, the center of gravity is located at the center.

In Fig. 71 (r), the allocation method is substantially the same as in Fig. 67 (a) except for the following. The luminance level of each sub frame period is set so that the relationship between the luminance level and the time-integrated luminance for the input image signal exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic.

More specifically, the luminance level to be assigned to each sub frame period is determined so that the number of sub frame periods to which the luminance level is assigned increases or decreases according to the gradation level of the input image signal, while the time-integration of one frame period The luminance always exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic with respect to the gradation level of the input image signal. Subsequently, a gradation level for realizing such a luminance level is set.

In Fig. 71 (s), in addition to the operation in Fig. 71 (r), the threshold level of the gradation level serving as a reference for allocating the luminance level to each sub frame period is set, so that the time-integrated luminance in one frame period is set. The gamma luminance characteristic appropriate to the gradation level of the input image signal is always exhibited.

According to the present invention, the following effects are provided in the field of an image display apparatus using a hold type image display element such as, for example, a liquid crystal display element or an EL display element. The reduction in maximum brightness and contrast is suppressed. The qualitative degradation caused by the temporal center of display luminance that varies depending on the gradation level of the input image signal is minimized. Minimizing the quality deterioration of the moving image displayed by the residual image and the motion blur, and at the same time maintaining compatibility with the gradation display with image signals generated to be output to image display elements having general gamma luminance characteristics.

Various modifications will be apparent to those skilled in the art and can readily be devised without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention. Therefore, the claims appended to this specification should not be limited to the above description but should be construed broadly.

Claims (136)

An image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display unit in two sub frame periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the display control section includes an image signal having a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, And supplies an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level in the sub frame period β; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control section includes, in the image display section, an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the sub frame period α, or an image signal of a relatively gradation level, and An image display apparatus which supplies an image signal of a gradation level which is increased or decreased by a gradation level of an input image signal in a sub frame period β. An image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display unit in two sub frame periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; Threshold levels, T1 and T2, of the gradation levels in the two subframe periods are defined, and the threshold level T2 is greater than the threshold level T1; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the display control section instructs the image display portion of the gradation level of the gradation level to be increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame period. supply an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a signal signal of a relatively small gradation level in β; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the display control unit supplies an image signal of the gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α. And in the sub frame period β, supplying an image signal having a gradation level lower than the gradation level supplied in the sub frame period α and increasing or decreasing in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal; When the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T2, the display control section includes, in the image display section, an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value in the sub frame period α, or an image signal of a relatively gradation level, and An image display apparatus for supplying an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of an input image signal in a sub frame period β. An image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display unit in two sub frame periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; Threshold levels, T1 and T2, of the gradation levels in the two subframe periods are defined, and the threshold level T2 is greater than the threshold level T1; The gradation level L is uniquely determined; When the gradation level of the input image signal is equal to or less than the threshold level T1, the display control section instructs the image display portion of the gradation level of the gradation level to be increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame period. supply an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or a signal signal of a relatively small gradation level in β; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 and less than or equal to the threshold level T2, the display control section is provided with an image signal of the gradation level L in the sub frame period α, and the input image in the sub frame period β. Supplying an image signal having a gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the signal; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T2, the display control section instructs the image display section of the image signal of the gradation level which is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the sub frame period α, and the sub frame period β. An image display apparatus for supplying an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively gradation level larger than a predetermined value. An image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display unit in two sub frame periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; The display control unit generates an image of an intermediate state in time through estimation based on the images of two frames which are continuously input; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; In the sub frame period α, when the gradation level of the input image signal is lower than or equal to a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the display control unit sends an image signal having a gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display unit. Supply; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display section with an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively gradation level; In the sub-frame period β, when the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state is equal to or less than the threshold level, the display control section instructs the image display unit an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level. Supplying; When the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state is larger than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display unit with an image signal of the gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal in the intermediate state. , Image display device. An image display apparatus for performing image display of one frame by the total amount of time integral values of luminance displayed on an image display unit in two sub frame periods, wherein the image display apparatus includes: A display control section for performing image display control of two sub frame periods in the image display section in each one frame period; One of the sub frame periods is called a sub frame period alpha, and the other sub frame period is called a sub frame period beta; In the sub frame period α, when the gradation level of the input image signal is lower than or equal to a threshold level that is uniquely determined, the display control unit supplies an image signal having a gradation level increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal to the image display unit. and; When the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies the image display section with an image signal of a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively gradation level; In the sub frame period β, when the average value of the gradation level of the input image signal and the gradation level of the image signal input one frame or one frame after the current frame period is equal to or less than the threshold level, the display control unit Supplying an image signal of a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or an image signal of a relatively small gradation level; And when the average value is larger than the threshold level, the display control unit supplies, to the image display unit, an image signal of a gradation level that is increased or decreased in accordance with the average value. The image display apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths. The sub frame period α is the second of the two sub frame periods when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level. Assigned to a sub frame period; When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. , Image display device. The display device according to claim 1, wherein when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the trademark display portion is Lmin, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. The image display device according to claim 1, wherein the display control unit sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period. 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the upper limit L1 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to another sub frame period. And the display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy a relationship of L1? L2. The gradation level of the image signal supplied to each subframe period so that the relationship between the time integration value of the luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal during the one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. An image display apparatus which sets a threshold level that serves as a reference for the image and sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period. 12. The apparatus of claim 11, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, An image display apparatus which can change a gamma luminance characteristic set externally by said gamma luminance characteristic setting portion. The display apparatus of claim 1, further comprising a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity. According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and further determines the threshold level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. An gradation level is set, and the gradation level of the image signal is supplied after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The display control unit according to claim 1, wherein when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit comprises: a ratio between luminance levels displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal; An image display apparatus which sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period such that the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same. The display apparatus of claim 1, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ; A first gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the line data storage section into a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by the gradation level of the input image signal. ; Second gray level conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal. part; And And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section to select an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supply the selected image signal to the image display section. , Image display device. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 10% when set to 0%. The gradation level of claim 1, wherein the gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level of greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 10% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 2% when set to 0%. The gradation level higher than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The image display apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen. The image display apparatus according to claim 20, wherein each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels. The image display apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths. The image supplied in the sub-frame period β and the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α when the gray level of the input image signal is greater than or equal to the threshold level T1 or less. The gradation level of the signal is set so that the difference between the gradation levels is constant or the difference between the luminance level in the sub frame period α and the luminance level in the sub frame period β is constant. The image display device according to claim 2, wherein the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the initial sub frame period is not more than half the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the subsequent sub frame period. 3. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α and the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period β when the gradation level of the input image signal is greater than the threshold level T1 or less than the threshold level T2. The gradation level is set so that the relation between the gradation levels is set by a function, or the relation between the luminance levels in the sub frame period α and the luminance levels in the sub frame period β is set by the function. Device. The sub frame period α is the second of the two sub frame periods when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level. Assigned to a sub frame period; When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. , Image display device. The method according to claim 2, wherein when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. The image display device according to claim 2, wherein the display control unit sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period. The method according to claim 2, wherein the upper limit L1 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to another sub frame period. And the display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy a relationship of L1? L2. The gradation level of the image signal supplied to each subframe period so that the relationship between the time integration value of the luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal during the one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. An image display apparatus which sets a threshold level that serves as a reference for the image and sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period. 31. The apparatus of claim 30, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, An image display apparatus which can change a gamma luminance characteristic set externally by said gamma luminance characteristic setting portion. The display device of claim 2, further comprising a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity. According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and further determines the threshold level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. An gradation level is set, and the gradation level of the image signal is supplied after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The display control unit according to claim 2, wherein when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit comprises: a ratio between luminance levels displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal; An image display apparatus which sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period such that the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same. The display apparatus of claim 2, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ; A first gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the line data storage section into a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal ; Second gray level conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal. part; And And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section to select an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supply the selected image signal to the image display section. , Image display device. The image display apparatus according to claim 34, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel portions on the screen. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level of greater than 90% when the relatively gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents a relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 10% when set to 0%. The image display apparatus according to claim 36, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen. The gradation level higher than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 10% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level greater than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 2% when set to 0%. The gradation level higher than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The image display apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen. 42. An image display apparatus according to claim 41, wherein each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels. An image display apparatus according to claim 3, wherein the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α and the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period β when the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T1 or less than the threshold level T2. The gradation level is set so that the difference between the gradation levels is constant or the difference between the luminance level in the sub frame period α and the luminance level in the sub frame period β is constant. 45. The image display device according to claim 44, wherein the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the initial sub frame period is not more than half the gradation level of the image signal allocated in the subsequent sub frame period. The gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period α and the gradation level of the image signal supplied in the sub frame period β when the gradation level of the input image signal is larger than the threshold level T1 or less than the threshold level T2. The gradation level is set so that the relation between the gradation levels is set by a function, or the relation between the luminance levels in the sub frame period α and the luminance levels in the sub frame period β is set by the function. Device. 4. The sub frame period α is the second of the two sub frame periods when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level. Assigned to a sub frame period; When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. , Image display device. The method according to claim 3, wherein when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. The image display apparatus according to claim 3, wherein the display control unit sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period. 4. The method according to claim 3, wherein the upper limit L1 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to another sub frame period. And the display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy a relationship of L1? L2. 4. The gradation level of the image signal supplied to each subframe period according to claim 3, wherein the display control section provides a gamma luminance characteristic in which the relationship between the time integration value of the luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal during the one frame period is appropriate. An image display apparatus which sets a threshold level that serves as a reference for the image and sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period. 53. The apparatus of claim 51, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, An image display apparatus which can change a gamma luminance characteristic set externally by said gamma luminance characteristic setting portion. The display device of claim 3, further comprising a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity. According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and further determines the threshold level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. An gradation level is set, and the gradation level of the image signal is supplied after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The display control unit according to claim 3, wherein when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit comprises: a ratio between luminance levels displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal; An image display apparatus which sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period such that the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same. The display apparatus of claim 3, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ; A first gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the line data storage section into a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by the gradation level of the input image signal. ; Second gray level conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal. part; And And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section to select an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supply the selected image signal to the image display section. , Image display device. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level larger than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is set to 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value indicates the relatively small luminance level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 10% when set to 0%. The gradation level higher than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level of greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively higher. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 10% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 2% when set to 0%. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively higher. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The image display apparatus according to claim 3, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen. 61. The image display apparatus according to claim 60, wherein each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels. An image display apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths. The sub frame period α is the second of the two sub frame periods when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level. Assigned to a sub frame period; When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. , Image display device. The method according to claim 4, wherein the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin. The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods, The response time of the image display portion for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. The image display device according to claim 4, wherein the display control unit sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period. 5. The method according to claim 4, wherein the upper limit L1 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is the gradation level of the image signal supplied to the other sub frame periods. And the display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy a relationship of L1? L2. 5. The gradation level of the image signal supplied to each subframe period according to claim 4, wherein the display control section provides a gamma luminance characteristic in which the relationship between the time integration value of the luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal during the one frame period exhibits an appropriate gamma luminance characteristic. An image display apparatus for setting a threshold level serving as a reference for the reference and setting a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period. 68. The apparatus of claim 67, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, An image display apparatus which can change a gamma luminance characteristic set externally by said gamma luminance characteristic setting portion. The display device of claim 4, further comprising a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity. According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and further determines the threshold level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. An gradation level is set, and the gradation level of the image signal is supplied after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The display control unit according to claim 4, wherein when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit comprises: a ratio between luminance levels displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal; An image display apparatus which sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period such that the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same. The display apparatus of claim 4, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A frame memory data selection unit, controlled by the timing control unit, to select the data output of the data read out from the frame data storage unit as being transmitted one frame or before the transfer of data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit; ; A first gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the line data storage section into a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by the gradation level of the input image signal. ; Second gray level conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal. part; And And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section to select an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supply the selected image signal to the image display section. , Image display device. The display apparatus of claim 4, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A first multiple line data memory unit and a second multiple line data memory unit for temporarily storing image signals of a plurality of horizontal lines; Controlled by the timing control section, and (i) transfer of data from the line data storage section to the frame data storage section, or (ii) one frame prior to being read from the frame data storage section into the first plurality of line data memory sections. A frame memory data selection unit for selecting data transfer and transfer of data read out from the frame data storage unit to a second multi-line data storage unit as input two frames before; An intermediate image generation unit for estimating and generating an image of an intermediate state in time between the image signal from the first multiple line data memory unit and the image signal from the second multiple line data memory unit; A temporary memory data selection unit controlled by the timing control unit to select an image signal from a first multi-line data memory unit or an image signal from a second multi-line data memory unit; A first gradation conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the temporary memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal part; A second gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the intermediate image generation section to a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal. ; And And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section to select an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supply the selected image signal to the image display section. , Image display device. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small luminance level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 10% when set to 0%. The gradation level higher than a predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and a gradation level lower than a predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 10% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level larger than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 2% when set to 0%. The gradation level higher than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The image display apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen. 78. The image display device according to claim 77, wherein each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels. The image display apparatus according to claim 5, wherein the sub frame periods have the same length or different lengths from each other. 6. The sub frame period α is the second of the two sub frame periods when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level. Assigned to a sub frame period; When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. , Image display device. The method according to claim 5, wherein when the relatively largest luminance level of the image display portion is Lmax and the relatively small luminance level of the image display portion is Lmin, The response time of the image display unit for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When shorter than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is assigned to the second sub frame period of the two sub frame periods, The response time of the image display portion for the brightness switching from the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax to the relatively small luminance level of Lmin is the luminance from the relatively small luminance level of Lmin to the relatively largest luminance level of Lmax. When longer than the response time of the image display unit for switching, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. The image display device according to claim 5, wherein the display control unit sets an upper limit of the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each sub frame period. 6. The method according to claim 5, wherein the upper limit L1 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to one of the sub frame periods, and the upper limit L2 is a gradation level of an image signal supplied to another sub frame period. And the display control unit sets L1 and L2 so as to satisfy a relationship of L1? L2. 6. The gradation level of the image signal supplied to each subframe period according to claim 5, wherein the display control section provides a gamma luminance characteristic in which the relationship between the time integration value of the luminance and the gradation level of the input image signal during the one frame period is appropriate. An image display apparatus which sets a threshold level that serves as a reference for the image and sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period. 85. The apparatus of claim 84, further comprising a gamma luminance characteristic setting unit for externally setting the gamma luminance characteristic, An image display apparatus which can change a gamma luminance characteristic set externally by said gamma luminance characteristic setting portion. The display device of claim 5, further comprising a temperature detector for detecting a temperature of the display panel or its vicinity. According to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, the display control unit sets a threshold level serving as a reference for the gradation level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period, and further determines the threshold level of the image signal supplied in each subframe period. An gradation level is set, and the gradation level of the image signal is supplied after being increased or decreased in accordance with the gradation level of the input image signal. The display control unit according to claim 5, wherein when the input image signal has a plurality of color components, the display control unit comprises: a ratio between luminance levels displayed in each sub frame period of colors other than the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal; An image display apparatus which sets a gradation level of an image signal supplied in each subframe period such that the ratio between the luminance levels displayed in each subframe period of the color having the highest gradation level of the input image signal is the same. The display apparatus of claim 5, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A frame memory data selection unit controlled by the timing control unit to select to transfer data from the line data storage unit to the frame data storage unit or to output data read out from the frame data storage unit as input one frame before; A first gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the line data storage section into a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal ; Second gray level conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the frame memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal. part; And And an output data selection section controlled by the timing control section to select an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supply the selected image signal to the image display section. , Image display device. The display apparatus of claim 5, wherein the display control unit comprises: A timing controller; A line data storage section for receiving and temporarily storing one horizontal line image signal; A first multiple line data memory unit and a second multiple line data memory unit for temporarily storing image signals of a plurality of horizontal lines; Controlled by the timing control section, and (i) transfer of data from the line data storage section to the frame data storage section, or (ii) one frame prior to being read from the frame data storage section into the first plurality of line data memory sections. A frame memory data selector for selecting data transfer and transfer of data read out from the frame data storage to a second multi-line data memory, input two frames before; A gradation level average section for calculating an average value of the gradation level of the image signal from the first plural line data memory section and the gradation level of the image signal from the second plural line data memory section and supplying the average value to the second gradation conversion section; A temporary memory data selection section controlled by the timing control section for selecting an image signal from a first plurality of line data memory sections or an image signal from a second plurality of line data memory sections; A first gradation conversion for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the temporary memory data selection section to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by a relatively largest level or a gradation level larger than a predetermined value or by a gradation level of the input image signal part; A second gradation conversion section for converting the gradation level of the image signal supplied from the intermediate image generation section to a relatively small level or a gradation level lower than a predetermined value or to a gradation level that is increased or decreased by the gradation level of the input image signal. ; And An output data selection section controlled by the timing control section for selecting an image signal from the first gradation conversion section or an image signal from the second gradation conversion section, and supplying the selected image signal to the image display section; , Image display device. 6. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small luminance level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 10% when set to 0%. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 90% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 10% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. 6. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level greater than 98% when the relatively largest gradation level is set to 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value represents the relatively small gradation level. An image display device having a gradation level lower than 2% when set to 0%. 6. The gradation level larger than the predetermined value is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level greater than 98% when the relatively largest luminance level is 100%, and the gradation level lower than the predetermined value is relatively high. An image display apparatus which is a gradation level corresponding to a luminance level lower than 2% when the smallest luminance level is 0%. The image display device according to claim 5, wherein the display control unit performs display control for each of the plurality of pixel units on the screen. 95. An image display apparatus according to claim 94, wherein each pixel portion includes one pixel or a predetermined number of pixels. An apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods including at least an? Sub frame period and a? Sub frame period, Means for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And Means for displaying an image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein when the moving object portion and the background portion are at a luminance level of less than 50% of the relatively largest luminance, the luminance level of the relatively smallest value is plural. When the luminance level is supplied in at least β sub frame period of the sub frame period, and the moving object portion and the background portion are at least 50% of the luminance level of the largest relative luminance, the luminance level of the largest value is larger than the plurality of sub frame periods. A display device supplied at least in the? Sub frame period. 98. The display device according to claim 96, wherein the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods. 98. The α sub frame period according to claim 97, wherein when the response time of the means for displaying on the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the means for displaying on the increase in the luminance level. Assigned to the second sub frame period of the frame period; When the response time of the means for displaying against the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the means for displaying against the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. Assigned to the display. 98. The method of claim 97, wherein the response time of the means for displaying on the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the means for displaying on the increase in the luminance level, and the? Sub frame period is two sub-frames. A display device assigned to the second sub frame period of the period. 98. The method of claim 97, wherein the response time of the means for displaying on the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the means for displaying on the increase in the luminance level, wherein the sub frame period α is one of the two sub frame periods. A display device allocated to the first sub frame period. An apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods, Means for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And Means for displaying an input image signal at the supplied gradation level, wherein the luminance level of the moving object portion supplied in the first sub frame period is a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. The luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also lower than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, and the luminance level of the moving object part supplied in the first sub frame period is set to the second sub frame period. When the luminance level is relatively greater than the luminance level supplied in the frame period, the display device wherein the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also the luminance level relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. . 102. The display device according to claim 101, wherein the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods. An apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods including at least an? Sub frame period and a? Sub frame period, A display control unit suitable for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And A luminance level of a relatively small value, when the luminance level is less than 50% of the relative luminance, which includes an image display portion, which is suitable for displaying image signals at the supplied gradation level; When at least β sub frame periods of the plurality of sub frame periods are supplied, and the moving object portion and the background portion are at least 50% of the luminance level of the largest relative luminance, the luminance level of the largest value is the plurality of sub frame periods. A display device supplied to at least the? Sub frame period in the frame period. 103. The display device according to claim 103, wherein the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods. 107. The alpha sub frame period of claim 104, wherein when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, Assigned to two sub frame periods; When the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, the sub frame period α is allocated to the first sub frame period of the two sub frame periods. Display. 107. The alpha sub frame period of claim 104, wherein when the response time of the image display portion to the decrease in the luminance level is relatively shorter than the response time of the image display portion to the increase in the luminance level, A display device allocated to two sub frame periods. 107. The subframe period? Is the first subframe of the two subframe periods when the response of the image display unit to the decrease in the luminance level is longer than the response time of the image display unit to the increase in the luminance level. Display, assigned to a period. An apparatus for displaying an image of an input image signal including at least a moving object portion and a background portion, wherein one frame period is divided into a plurality of sub frame periods, A display control unit suitable for supplying a gradation level of an input image signal; And An image display portion suitable for displaying an image signal with the supplied gray level, wherein the luminance level of the moving object portion supplied in the first sub frame period is a luminance level relatively smaller than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. When the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period is also lower than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period, the luminance level of the moving object part supplied in the first sub frame period is set to the second. When the luminance level is relatively greater than the luminance level supplied in the sub frame period, the luminance level of the background supplied in the first sub frame period also becomes the luminance level relatively larger than the luminance level supplied in the second sub frame period. Device. 109. The display device according to claim 108, wherein the plurality of sub frame periods are two sub frame periods. An image display apparatus according to claim 1, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the image display device. An image display apparatus according to claim 1, and And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of an image display unit of an image display apparatus according to claim 1. An image display apparatus according to claim 2, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the image display device. An image display apparatus according to claim 2, and And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device. An electronic device for performing image display on a screen of an image display unit of an image display apparatus according to claim 2. An image display apparatus according to claim 3, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the image display device. An image display apparatus according to claim 3, and And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of an image display unit of an image display apparatus according to claim 3. An image display apparatus according to claim 4, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the image display device. An image display apparatus according to claim 4, and And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of an image display unit of an image display apparatus according to claim 4. An image display apparatus according to claim 5, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the image display device. An image display apparatus according to claim 5, and And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of an image display unit of an image display apparatus according to claim 5. Device for displaying in accordance with claim 103, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the image display device. Device for displaying in accordance with claim 103, and And a signal processing unit for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control unit of the image display device. 104. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of an image display unit of an apparatus for displaying according to claim 103. Apparatus for displaying according to claim 108, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a channel selected by the display control section of the device for displaying. Apparatus for displaying according to claim 108, and And a signal processing section for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal in a display control section of the device for displaying. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of an image display unit of an apparatus for displaying according to claim 108. 96. An apparatus for displaying according to claim 96, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to means for supplying the device for displaying. 96. An apparatus for displaying according to claim 96, and And a signal processing section for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal, in the supply means of the device for displaying. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of a display means of a device for displaying according to claim 96. Apparatus for displaying according to claim 101, and And a tuner section for outputting a TV broadcast signal of a selected channel to means for supplying the device for displaying. Apparatus for displaying according to claim 101, and And a signal processing section for outputting a monitor image signal obtained by processing an external monitor signal, in the supply means of the device for displaying. An electronic device for displaying an image on a screen of a display means of a device for displaying according to claim 101.

Images